2022 RAM PROMASTER CITY
OWNER’S MANUAL
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates,
and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except
as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently
when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle.
This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle.
Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make
changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon
itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in
substitution therefore.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual,
Navigation/Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover.
U.S. Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty
Booklet by calling 1-866-726-4636 or by contacting your dealer. Replacement kits can be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com.
Canadian Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the
Warranty Booklet or purchase a replacement kit by calling 1-800-387-1143 or by contacting your dealer.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1INTRODUCTION..............................................................................................................................6
2GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE .................................................................................10
3GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL .......................................................39
4STARTING AND OPERATING .................................................................................................52
5MULTIMEDIA .................................................................................................................................78
6SAFETY ..........................................................................................................................................131
7IN CASE OF EMERGENCY ......................................................................................................171
8SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE .......................................................................................189
9TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................236
10CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE .....................................................................................................242
11INDEX.............................................................................................................................................246
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 1
2
INTRODUCTION
SYMBOLS KEY...........................................................7
VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS..............................7
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS.............7
SYMBOL GLOSSARY.................................................8
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS ....................................................................... 10
Key Fob .............................................................10
SENTRY KEY ........................................................... 12
IGNITION SWITCH .................................................. 12
DOORS ................................................................... 13
Power Door Locks ............................................13
Auto Unlock Doors............................................13
Sliding Side Door..............................................13
Double Rear Swing Doors................................15
Child-Protection Door Lock System.................15
STEERING WHEEL.................................................. 16
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column...................16
SEATS...................................................................... 16
Manual Adjustment (Front Seats) ...................16
Folding Rear Seat — If Equipped.....................17
Heated Seats — If Equipped ............................18
Head Restraints ...............................................19
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION ........................21
Introducing Voice Recognition.........................21
Basic Voice Commands ...................................21
Get Started .......................................................21
Additional Information .....................................21
MIRRORS ...............................................................22
Inside Rearview Mirror.....................................22
Vanity Mirror .....................................................22
Outside Mirrors ................................................22
EXTERIOR LIGHTS ..................................................24
Multifunction Lever ..........................................24
Headlights ........................................................24
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) —
If Equipped .......................................................24
High/Low Beam Switch....................................24
Flash-To-Pass ..................................................24
Parking Lights ..................................................24
Follow Me Home/Headlight Delay ..................24
Fog Lights — If Equipped .................................25
Turn Signals......................................................25
Lane Change Assist..........................................25
INTERIOR LIGHTS ..................................................25
Courtesy/Interior Lights...................................25
WIPERS AND WASHERS ......................................26
Front Wiper Operation......................................27
Rear Wiper And Washer —If Equipped............28
CLIMATE CONTROLS ............................................ 28
Manual Climate Control Descriptions And
Functions ..........................................................28
Operating Tips ..................................................30
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT............... 31
Storage .............................................................31
USB Control — If Equipped ..............................32
Power Outlets ..................................................32
WINDOWS ............................................................. 34
Power Window Controls —If Equipped ...........34
Window Bar Grates — If Equipped ..................35
Wind Buffeting .................................................35
HOOD....................................................................... 36
Opening.............................................................36
Closing ..............................................................36
CARGO AREA FEATURES...................................... 37
Rear Cargo Tie-Downs .....................................37
ROOF RACK — IF EQUIPPED................................. 37
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR
INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER......................................... 39
Instrument Cluster Descriptions .....................40
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY ....................... 40
Location And Controls......................................40
Change Engine Oil — If Equipped ...................41
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items.........42
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 2
3
TRIP COMPUTER.................................................... 43
Trip Button ........................................................43
Trip Functions ..................................................43
Values Displayed ..............................................44
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ................... 44
Red Warning Lights ..........................................44
Yellow Warning Lights ......................................47
Green Indicator Lights......................................49
Blue Indicator Lights ........................................50
White Indicator Lights ......................................50
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II ....... 50
Onboard Diagnostic System
(OBD II) Cybersecurity ......................................51
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS ............................................................ 51
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE ........................................ 52
Automatic Transmission ..................................52
Normal Starting ................................................52
Cold Weather Operation .................................52
Extended Park Starting ....................................52
If Engine Fails To Start .....................................53
After Starting.....................................................53
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED............ 53
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS .......... 54
PARKING BRAKE .................................................. 54
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ...............................55
Key Ignition Park Interlock...............................56
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI)
System .............................................................56
9-Speed Automatic Transmission ..................56
POWER STEERING ................................................60
Power Steering Fluid Check ............................60
CRUISE CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED .......................60
To Activate ........................................................61
To Set A Desired Speed ...................................61
To Vary The Speed Setting...............................61
To Accelerate For Passing ...............................61
To Resume Speed............................................62
To Deactivate ...................................................62
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED ...........................................................62
ParkSense Rear Park Assist Sensors .............62
ParkSense Rear Park Assist Alerts .................63
ParkSense Rear Park Assist Failure
Indications ........................................................64
Cleaning The ParkSense Rear Park Assist
System ..............................................................64
ParkSense Rear Park Assist System Usage
Precautions.......................................................64
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA .................65
REFUELING THE VEHICLE .....................................66
VEHICLE LOADING................................................. 67
Vehicle Certification Label...............................67
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) .............67
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) ..................67
Tire Size ............................................................67
Rim Size............................................................67
Inflation Pressure.............................................67
Curb Weight......................................................67
Overloading ......................................................68
Loading ............................................................68
TRAILER TOWING .................................................. 68
Common Towing Definitions............................68
Trailer Hitch Classification...............................70
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) ...............................................71
Trailer And Tongue Weight .............................71
Towing Requirements .....................................71
Towing Tips ......................................................74
RECREATIONAL TOWING
(BEHIND MOTORHOME) ....................................... 75
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle.... 75
Recreational Towing — Automatic Transmission.. 76
DRIVING TIPS ......................................................... 76
Driving On Slippery Surfaces ..........................76
Driving Through Water ....................................76
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 3
4
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS ........................................... 78
CYBERSECURITY ................................................... 78
UCONNECT SETTINGS .......................................... 79
Uconnect 3/3 NAV Settings.............................79
UCONNECT INTRODUCTION.................................. 88
Identifying Your Radio......................................88
Safety And General Information......................90
UCONNECT MODES ............................................... 91
Radio Mode ......................................................91
Media Mode......................................................98
Phone Mode ................................................. 100
NAVIGATION MODE — IF EQUIPPED..................110
Operating Navigation Mode —If Equipped ... 110
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS —
IF EQUIPPED ........................................................128
Radio Operation ............................................ 128
Media Mode................................................... 129
RAM TELEMATICS - IF EQUIPPED ......................129
Ram Telematics General Information.......... 129
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES .....130
Regulatory And Safety Information .............. 130
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES.............................................. 131
Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS).. 131
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System ...... 132
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS.......................... 135
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) .... 135
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ................... 137
Occupant Restraint Systems........................ 137
Important Safety Precautions ...................... 137
Seat Belt Systems ........................................ 138
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) ...... 144
Child Restraints............................................. 152
SAFETY TIPS ....................................................... 168
Transporting Passengers.............................. 168
Transporting Pets ......................................... 168
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle ................................................... 168
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle ...................................... 169
Exhaust Gas................................................... 170
Carbon Monoxide Warnings ........................ 170
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS......................... 171
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING......................... 171
Preparations For Jacking ............................. 171
Jack Location — If Equipped......................... 172
Removing The Spare Tire —If Equipped....... 172
Jacking Instructions ...................................... 174
Vehicles With Alloy Wheels........................... 177
Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers........ 178
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED ....................179
Tire Service Kit Storage ................................ 179
Tire Service Kit Usage................................... 179
JUMP STARTING ..................................................181
Preparations For Jump Starting ................... 181
Jump Starting Procedure.............................. 182
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ...........................183
IGNITION KEY REMOVAL OVERRIDE .................184
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE ..............................184
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ..............................185
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE..........................187
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS) ..................................................................188
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR).........................188
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING ....................................189
Maintenance Plan......................................... 190
ENGINE COMPARTMENT ....................................193
Engine Compartment — 2.4L ....................... 193
Checking Oil Level ........................................ 194
Adding Washer Fluid .................................... 194
Maintenance-Free Battery ........................... 194
Pressure Washing ......................................... 195
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 4
5
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE .....................................195
Engine Oil....................................................... 195
Engine Oil Filter ............................................. 196
Engine Air Cleaner Filter .............................. 196
Air Conditioner Maintenance ....................... 196
Body Lubrication............................................ 197
Windshield Wiper Blades.............................. 197
Exhaust System ............................................ 198
Cooling System ............................................. 199
Brake System ............................................... 202
Automatic Transmission .............................. 203
Upfitter Connectors — If Equipped ............... 204
Fuses.............................................................. 207
Bulb Replacement......................................... 213
TIRES .....................................................................217
Tire Safety Information ................................ 217
Tires — General Information ........................ 225
Tire Types....................................................... 228
Spare Tires — If Equipped............................. 229
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ........................ 231
Tire Chains and Traction Devices ................ 232
Tire Rotation Recommendations ................. 232
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES ......................................232
Treadwear...................................................... 232
Traction Grades............................................. 233
Temperature Grades..................................... 233
STORING THE VEHICLE ......................................233
BODYWORK ......................................................... 233
Protection From Atmospheric Agents .......... 233
Body And Underbody Maintenance.............. 234
Preserving The Bodywork ............................. 234
INTERIORS .......................................................... 235
Seats And Fabric Parts ................................. 235
Plastic And Coated Parts .............................. 235
Leather Surfaces........................................... 235
Glass Surfaces ............................................. 235
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) ........ 236
BRAKE SYSTEM................................................... 236
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS.. 236
Torque Specifications ................................... 236
FUEL REQUIREMENTS ........................................ 237
2.4L Engine ................................................... 237
Reformulated Gasoline ................................ 238
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ........................ 238
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles ......... 238
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications ...... 238
MMT In Gasoline ........................................... 238
Materials Added To Fuel............................... 239
Fuel System Cautions ................................... 239
FLUID CAPACITIES ............................................. 240
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS................... 240
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ................ 241
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE ....................................................242
Prepare For The Appointment ...................... 242
Prepare A List ................................................ 242
Be Reasonable With Requests..................... 242
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ................................242
FCA US LLC Customer Center....................... 242
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center .............. 242
Mexico............................................................ 243
Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands ............... 243
Customer Assistance For The Hearing
Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY).................... 243
Service Contract ........................................... 243
WARRANTY INFORMATION................................244
MOPAR® PARTS .................................................244
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ..........................244
In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C............................................ 244
In Canada ...................................................... 244
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ..........................245
GENERAL INFORMATION....................................245
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 5
6
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on selecting your new Ram. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality. This Owner’s Manual has
been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is supplemented
by customer-oriented documents. Within this information, you will find a description of the services that FCA US LLC offers to its customers as well as the details
of the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read all of these publications carefully before driving your vehicle for the first time.
Following the instructions, recommendations, tips, and important warnings in this manual will help ensure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle. Be sure
you are familiar with all vehicle controls, particularly those used for braking, steering, transmission, and transfer case shifting (if equipped). Learn how your
vehicle handles on different road surfaces. Your driving skills will improve with experience.
This Owner’s Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated in
the text. Therefore, you should only consider the information that is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content
introduced throughout the Owner’s Information, which may or may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If Equipped”. All data
contained in this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant improvement of the vehicles
produced. For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For further information,
contact an authorized dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that authorized dealers know your Ram best, have factory-trained technicians and genuine Mopar® parts, and care about
your satisfaction.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 6
7
SYMBOLS KEY
If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Cautions and Warnings.
VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS
The New Vehicle Limited Warranty does not apply to body modifications or
special equipment installed by van conversion/camper manufacturers/body
builders. U.S. residents refer to the Warranty Information, Section 2.1.C.
Canadian residents refer to the “What Is Not Covered” section of the Warranty
Information. Such equipment includes video monitors, DVD/Blu-ray™,
heaters, stoves, refrigerators, etc. For warranty coverage and service on these
items, contact the applicable manufacturer.
Operating instructions for the special equipment installed by the conversion/
camper manufacturer should also be supplied with your vehicle. If these
instructions are missing, please contact an authorized dealer for assistance in
obtaining replacement documents from the applicable manufacturer.
For information on the Body Builder’s Guide refer to
www.rambodybuilder.com. This website contains dimensional and technical
specifications for your vehicle. It is intended for Second Stage Manufacturer's
technical support. For service issues, contact an authorized dealer.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
These statements are against operating
procedures that could result in a collision, bodily
injury and/or death.
CAUTION!
These statements are against procedures that
could result in damage to your vehicle.
NOTE:
A suggestion which will improve installation,
operation, and reliability. If not followed, may
result in damage.
TIP:
General ideas/solutions/suggestions on easier
use of the product or functionality.
PAGE REFERENCE
ARROW
Follow this reference for additional information on
a particular feature.
FOOTNOTE
Supplementary and relevant information
pertaining to the topic.
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its
roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious
injury or death.
1
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 7
8
SYMBOL GLOSSARY
Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating
precautions to be observed when using this component. It is important to
follow all warnings when operating your vehicle. See below for the definition of
each symbol Ú page 44.
NOTE:
Warning and Indicator lights are different based upon equipment options and
current vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
Red Warning Lights
Air Bag Warning Light
Ú page 44
Brake Warning Light
Ú page 45
Battery Charge Warning Light
Ú page 45
Door Open Warning Light
Ú page 45
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Ú page 46
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 46
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Ú page 46
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 46
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Ú page 46
Transmission Fault Warning Light
Ú page 47
Engine Oil Level Warning Light
Ú page 47
Red Warning Lights
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 8
9
Yellow Warning Lights
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
Ú page 47
Low Fuel Warning Light
Ú page 47
Generic Warning Light
Ú page 47
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
Ú page 47
Vehicle Security Warning Light
Ú page 48
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning Light (MIL)
Ú page 48
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Warning Light
Ú page 49
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning Light
Ú page 49
Green Indicator Lights
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Ú page 49
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
Ú page 49
Front Fog Indicator Light
Ú page 49
Cruise Control Indicator Light
Ú page 50
Blue Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
Ú page 50
White Indicator Lights
Speed Warning Indicator Light
Ú page 50
1
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 9
10
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS
KEY FOB
Your vehicle uses a key start ignition system which
supports Remote Keyless Entry (RKE). The key fob
allows you to lock or unlock the doors from
distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m). The
key fob does not need to be pointed at the vehicle
to activate the system. The key fob also contains
an integrated mechanical key, which can be
accessed by pushing the mechanical key release
button.
NOTE:
The key fob may not be able to be detected by the
vehicle if it is located next to a mobile phone,
laptop or other electronic device; these devices
may block the key fob’s wireless signal
Ú page 245.
Key Fob With Integrated Mechanical Key
To Lock/Unlock The Doors
Push and release the unlock button to unlock all
doors (on passenger vehicles and U.S. cargo
vehicles) or unlock the front two doors (Canada
cargo vehicles). To lock the doors, push and
release the lock button once. The doors can also
be locked and unlocked manually by using the
mechanical key.
When the doors are unlocked, the turn signals will
flash. When the doors are locked, the turn signals
will flash and the horn will chirp (if activated
through the Uconnect Settings Ú page 79). If a
door is open when the lock button is pushed, the
turn signal lights will flash at an increased rate to
indicate that a door is still open.
Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob
The recommended replacement battery is
CR2032.
1 — Mechanical Key Release Button
2 — Driver/Passenger Unlock Button
3 — Lock Button
4 — Cargo Lock/Unlock Button
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 10
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 11
NOTE:
Customers are recommended to use a battery
obtained from Mopar®. Aftermarket coin
battery dimensions may not meet the original
OEM coin battery dimensions.
Perchlorate Material – special handling may
apply. See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazard-
ouswaste/perchlorate
.
1. Push the mechanical key release button and
release the mechanical key to access the
battery case screw located on the side of the
key fob.
2. Rotate the screw located on the side of the key
fob using a small screwdriver.
Key Fob Screw Location
3. Take out the battery case. Remove and
replace the battery observing its polarity.
4. Refit the battery case inside the key fob and
turn the screw to lock it into place.
Programming And Requesting Additional
Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by an
authorized dealer.
NOTE:
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be repurposed and reprogrammed to
another vehicle.
Only key fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and
operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is
programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.
Duplication of keys may be performed at an
authorized dealer. The VIN is required for
authorized dealer replacement of keys.
NOTE:
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system
serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
authorized dealer.
Keys must be ordered to the correct key cut to
match the vehicle locks.
WARNING!
The integrated key fob contains a coin cell
battery. Do not ingest the battery; there is a
chemical burn hazard. If the coin cell battery is
swallowed, it can cause severe internal burns
in just two hours and can lead to death.
If you think a battery may have been swal-
lowed or placed inside any part of the body,
seek immediate medical attention.
Keep new and used batteries away from chil-
dren. If the battery compartment does not
close securely, stop using the product and
keep it away from children.
WARNING!
Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle
and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle
unattended.
Always remember to place the ignition in the
OFF position.
2
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 11
12 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents
unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the
engine. The system does not need to be armed or
activated. Operation is automatic, regardless of
whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
The system uses ignition keys which have an
embedded electronic chip (transponder) to
prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore,
only keys that are programmed to the vehicle can
be used to start and operate the vehicle.
If the Vehicle Security Light is on after the key is
placed in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position, it
indicates that there is a problem with the
electronics.
All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
NOTE:
A key which has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key, even if it is cut to fit the
ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle
Ú page 245.
IGNITION SWITCH
1. Place the gear selector in PARK.
2. Rotate the key to the STOP (OFF/LOCK)
position.
3. Remove the key from the ignition switch lock
cylinder.
Ignition Switch Positions
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not
compatible with some aftermarket Remote
Starting systems. Use of these systems may
result in vehicle starting problems and loss of
security protection.
1 — AVV (START)
2 — MAR (ACC/ON/RUN)
3 — STOP (OFF/LOCK)
WARNING!
Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the trans-
mission into PARK, apply the parking brake, and
remove the key fob from the vehicle. When
leaving the vehicle, always lock your vehicle. In
case you switch off the vehicle and the transmis-
sion is not in PARK, a warning message will
appear on the cluster which indicates you to shift
the transmission into PARK and then you can
remove the key within 15 seconds. If 15 seconds
expire, you have to rotate the key from the STOP
(OFF/LOCK) position to the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN)
position and come back to the STOP (OFF/LOCK)
position in order to remove the key.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous
for a number of reasons. A child or others could
be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children. A child
could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup
may cause serious injury or death.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 12
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 13
NOTE:
When opening the driver’s door with the key in the
ignition and the ignition placed in the STOP (OFF/
LOCK) position, a chime will sound to remind you to
remove the key.
DOORS
POWER DOOR LOCKS
Door Lock/Unlock Switch
The doors can be locked or unlocked from inside
the vehicle by using the door lock/unlock switch.
To lock the doors, push down on the switch.
To unlock the doors, pull up on the switch.
AUTO UNLOCK DOORS
This feature unlocks both front doors (on Canada
cargo vehicles), or all doors (on passenger and U.S.
cargo vehicles) when the driver door is opened.
NOTE:
If the front passenger door, or the rear or side door
is opened, only the rear or side door is unlocked.
SLIDING SIDE DOOR
On cargo versions, the sliding side door is fitted
with a spring-loaded latch that stops the door from
opening any farther. To lock the door in place,
simply push the door as far as it will go; to release
it, pull forward firmly.
Opening And Closing From Outside The
Vehicle
Opening/Unlocking With A Key Fob In the
Passenger Vehicle And U.S. Cargo Vehicle —
If Equipped
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob
to unlock all doors. Push and release the cargo
unlock button on the key fob to unlock only the rear
cargo doors. To open one of the sliding side doors,
pull the handle out from the bottom, then slide the
door towards the rear of the vehicle until it locks
into place and cannot go any farther. The turn
signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock
signal.
Opening/Unlocking With A Key Fob In the
Canadian Cargo Vehicle — If Equipped
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob
to unlock the front two doors. Push and release the
cargo unlock button on the key fob once to unlock
the passenger/cargo area (side lateral sliding
doors and rear doors). The turn signal lights will
flash to acknowledge the unlock signal.
Unlocking With The Mechanical Key In Passenger
Vehicle
Push the mechanical key release button to expose
the mechanical key, insert the key into the driver
door exterior lock cylinder and turn the key
counterclockwise to unlock all doors.
Unlocking With The Mechanical Key In Cargo
Vehicle
Push the mechanical key release button to expose
the mechanical key and insert the key into the
driver door exterior lock cylinder and turn the key
counterclockwise to unlock the front doors. Insert
the key into the rear door exterior lock cylinder and
turn the key counterclockwise to unlock the rear
doors.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always
remove the key from the ignition and lock all the
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
2
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 13
14 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Closing/Locking With A Key Fob
Push and release the lock button on the key fob to
lock all doors, including the cargo area (side lateral
sliding doors and rear doors). The turn signal lights
will flash to acknowledge the lock signal.
Horn activation settings after a key fob lock
command can be adjusted manually through the
Uconnect system Ú page 79.
Locking With The Mechanical Key In Passenger
Vehicle
Push the mechanical key release button to expose
the mechanical key, insert the key into the driver
door exterior lock cylinder and turn the key
clockwise to lock all doors.
Locking With The Mechanical Key In Cargo Vehicle
Push the mechanical key release button to expose
the mechanical key, insert the key into the driver
door exterior lock cylinder and turn the key
clockwise to lock the front doors. Insert the key into
the rear door exterior lock cylinder and turn the key
clockwise to lock the rear doors.
Closing And Locking From Outside
Grab the side door handle and push towards the
front of the vehicle. Once the side door is secured
in the full closed position, use one of the prior
locking methods to lock the sliding side doors.
Opening And Closing From The Inside
Opening:
Pull the interior door handle to unlock the door,
then pull the handle and slide the door towards the
rear of the vehicle until it can go no farther.
Closing:
Pull the interior door handle to release the door
and then push it towards the front of the vehicle.
Key Emergency Lock (KEL) Device
The sliding side doors are provided with a device
for locking all the doors using an emergency lock in
case of a power fault. The device is located on the
rear of the sliding door.
The device can be engaged with the sliding side
doors open in one of the following positions:
KEL Device not engaged (doors unlocked)
KEL Device engaged (insert the ignition key
blade into the lock and rotate clockwise), doors
locked
Key Emergency Lock Device
The device is released and the doors can be
opened as follows:
If the power is restored:
By remote control.
Opening a front door by inserting the key into
the key cylinder.
If the power is not restored:
Opening the driver side door by mechanical key
and the other doors (passenger's side and
sliding side door) by pulling the inner handle.
If the child lock was engaged and the previously
described locking procedure was carried out,
operating the internal handle will not open the door
but will only realign the door lock knob. To open the
door, the outside handle must be pulled. The door
lock/unlock button is not disabled by the
engagement of the emergency lock.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 14
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15
DOUBLE REAR SWING DOORS
The rear double swing doors are fitted through a
fastening system which stops them when they
reach an opening angle of approximately 90
degrees.
Rear Door Check Strap Location
To open them wider to an angle of 180 degrees,
push the locking device (one on each side) and
simultaneously open the doors. The rear door
check strap will automatically re-engage when the
door is closed.
Using the key fob, you can do the following:
For cargo versions with swing door/cargo doors:
centrally unlock the load compartment (sliding
side doors + rear swing doors), centrally lock all
the doors.
For versions with swing door: local unlocking/
locking.
Opening/Closing The First Swing Door
From The Outside
To open the door, turn the key in the lock or push
the cargo unlock button on the key fob and then
pull the exterior handle to the left. To close the
door, turn the key in the lock or push the lock
button on the key fob.
Emergency Opening Of The First Swing
Door From The Inside
From inside the vehicle, use the interior door
release mechanism located on the left rear trim
panel.
Opening The Second Swing Door
After having opened the first door, pull the handle
located on the door face toward the rear of the
vehicle.
CHILD-PROTECTION DOOR LOCK
S
YSTEM
This system prevents the sliding side doors from
being opened from the inside. The child locks are
located on the rear of the sliding side doors.
The child locks can only be engaged/disengaged
with the sliding side door open.
Child Lock System
To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection Door
Lock System
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the mechanical key into the
lock and rotate to the lock or unlock position.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear
door.
The device remains engaged even if the doors are
unlocked remotely. This system prevents the
sliding side doors from being opened from the
inside.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be
opened from the outside when the
Child-Protection locks are engaged (locked).
2
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 15
16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
For emergency exit from the rear seats when the
Child-Protection Door Lock system is engaged,
manually raise the door lock knob to the unlocked
position, roll down the window, and open the door
using the outside door handle.
STEERING WHEEL
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen
or shorten the steering column. The steering
column control is located on the steering column,
below the turn signal lever.
Steering Column Control
To unlock the steering column, push the steering
column control downward. To tilt the steering
column, move the steering wheel upward or
downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten the
steering column, pull the steering wheel outward
or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering
column in position, pull the steering column
control up until fully engaged.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint system
of the vehicle.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT (FRONT SEATS)
The front driver and passenger seats can be
adjusted forward and rearward, and (if equipped),
may be reclined and the height and lumbar can be
adjusted. The forward/rearward adjustment bar is
located at the front of the seat, near the floor.
Height, lumbar and recline adjustment controls are
located on the outboard side of the seat.
Manual Front Seat Adjustments
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving
with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow
this warning may result in serious injury or death.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside
or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
1 — Forward/Rearward Adjustment Bar
2 — Height Adjustment Lever
3 — Recliner Adjustment Knob
4 — Lumbar Adjustment Knob
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 16
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
Forward And Rearward Adjustment
The adjustment bar is at the front of the seat, near
the floor. Pull the bar upward to move the seat
forward or rearward. Release the bar once the seat
is in the desired position. Then, using body
pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat
to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
Height Adjustment — If Equipped
The height adjustment lever is located on the
center outboard side of the seat. Lift up or push
down on the front lever to adjust the front of the
seat up or down.
Recliner Adjustment
The recliner knob is on the rear outboard side of
the seat. To recline the seatback, rotate the knob
rearward without leaning back. To return the
seatback to its normal upright position, lean
forward, rotate the knob forward until the seatback
is in the upright position.
Lumbar Support — If Equipped
This feature allows you to increase or decrease the
amount of lumbar support. The lumbar adjustment
knob is located on the rear upper outboard side of
the seatback. Rotate the knob forward to increase
and rearward to decrease the desired amount of
lumbar support.
FOLDING REAR SEAT — IF EQUIPPED
To provide additional storage area, each rear seat
can be folded flat to allow for extended cargo
space.
1. Locate the release lever (upper outboard side
of seat), and lift it upward until the seatback
releases.
Seatback Release Lever Locations
2. Slowly fold down the seatback.
3. Pull forward on the lower release lever located
on the lower outboard side of seat and lift the
seat for extended cargo space.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could
result in loss of control which could cause a
collision and serious injury or death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the
seat belts and while the vehicle is parked.
Serious injury or death could result from a
poorly adjusted seat belt.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat
could cause you to lose control. The seat belt
might not be adjusted properly and you could
be injured. Adjust the seat only while the
vehicle is parked.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally
injured. Use the recliner only when the vehicle
is parked.
2
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 17
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Release Lever
Extended Cargo Space
4. Reverse order for original setting.
HEATED SEATS — IF EQUIPPED
The controls for the front heated seats
are located on the lower outboard side
of the seat.
Heated Seat Control Button
Push the switch once to turn on the heated seats.
The LED on the switch illuminates when the heated
seat is on. Push the switch a second time to shut
the heating elements off.
NOTE:
This feature is only available with the ignition
key in MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position.
Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic illness,
diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication,
alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical
condition must exercise care when using the
seat heater. It may cause burns even at low
temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat or seatback
that insulates against heat, such as a blanket
or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to
overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been over-
heated could cause serious burns due to the
increased surface temperature of the seat.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 18
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of
injury by restricting head movement in the event of
a rear impact. Head restraints should be adjusted
so that the top of the head restraint is located
above the top of your ear.
Front Adjustment
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push
the adjustment button, located on the base of the
head restraint, and push downward on the head
restraint.
Front Head Restraint
Rear Adjustment — If Equipped
The outboard and center head restraints are
adjustable and removable. To raise the head
restraint, push and hold the adjustment button,
located on the base of the head restraint and pull
upward on the head restraint. To lower the head
restraint, push and hold the adjustment button,
and push downward on the head restraint till the
desired height is reached.
Outboard Head Restraint
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until
the head restraints are placed in their proper
positions in order to minimize the risk of neck
injury in the event of a crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle
with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or
death in the event of a collision.
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
WARNING!
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in
the vehicle to properly protect the occupants.
Follow the reinstallation instructions above prior
to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat.
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
2
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 19
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Center Head Restraint
Front Removal
To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it
can go then push the release button and the
adjustment button at the base of each post while
pulling the head restraint up. To reinstall the head
restraint, put the head restraint posts into the
holes and push downward. Then adjust the head
restraint to the appropriate height.
Rear Removal — If Equipped
To remove the rear head restraints, push the
release button and adjustment button while
pulling upward on the whole assembly. To reinstall
the headrest, put the head restraint posts into the
holes while pushing the release button and
adjustment button. Then adjust it to the
appropriate height.
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could cause serious injury
or death to occupants of the vehicle. Always
securely stow removed head restraints in a
location outside the occupant compartment.
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could cause serious
injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.
Always securely stow removed head
restraints in a location outside the occupant
compartment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in
the vehicle to properly protect the occupants.
Follow the reinstallation instructions above
prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a
seat.
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could cause serious
injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.
Always securely stow removed head
restraints in a location outside the occupant
compartment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in
the vehicle to properly protect the occupants.
Follow the reinstallation instructions above
prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a
seat.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 20
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION
INTRODUCING VOICE RECOGNITION
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these
helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice
Commands and tips you need to know to control
your vehicle’s Voice Recognition (VR) system.
Uconnect 3
BASIC VOICE COMMANDS
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at
any point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button . After the beep, say:
“
Cancel” to stop a current voice session.
“Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice
Commands.
“
Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again.
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your Voice
Recognition system’s status.
GET STARTED
The VR button is used to activate/deactivate
your Voice Recognition system.
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:
Reduce background noise. Wind noise and
passenger conversations are examples of noise
that may impact recognition.
Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume
while facing straight ahead.
Each time you give a Voice Command, first push
the VR button, wait until after the beep, then say
your Voice Command.
You can interrupt the help message or system
prompts by pushing the VR button and saying a
Voice Command from the current category.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
© 2021 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar
Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC.
SiriusXM® and all related marks and logos are
trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
For Uconnect system support, call
1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a week)
or visit
DriveUconnect.com (US) or
DriveUconnect.ca (Canada) Ú page 245.
1 — Push To Mute
2 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call,
Send, Or Receive A Text
3 — Push To Begin Radio, Media, And Navigation
4 — Push To End Call
2
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 21
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR
Manual Mirror — If Equipped
The rearview mirror can be adjusted up, down, left,
and right. The mirror should be adjusted to center
on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be
reduced by moving the small control under the
mirror to the night position (toward the rear of the
vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while set in
the day position (toward the windshield).
Manual Mirror Adjustment
VANITY MIRROR
The driver and passenger sun visors are located on
the headliner, near the front windshield. The sun
visor can be rotated downward or up against the
door glass. Your vehicle may be equipped with a
courtesy mirror located on the passenger sun
visor.
Sun Visor (Passenger Side Shown)
Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature
The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for
additional flexibility in positioning the sun visor to
block out the sun.
1. Fold down the sun visor.
2. Unclip the visor from the corner clip.
3. Pull the sun visor toward the inside rearview
mirror to extend it.
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
The outside mirror(s) can be adjusted to the center
of the adjacent lane of traffic to achieve the
optimal view.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on side
convex mirrors could cause you to collide with
another vehicle or other object. Use your inside
mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in a side convex mirror.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 22
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
The door mirrors are hinged to allow the mirror to
be folded forward or rearward to help avoid
damage.
Folding Mirrors
Manual Outside Mirrors — If Equipped
From the inside of the vehicle, use the control lever
to adjust the mirror.
Manual Mirror Control Lever
Power Outside Mirrors — If Equipped
The power mirror controls are located on the mirror
flag trim above the driver’s door trim panel. To
adjust a mirror, turn the control knob toward the
left or right mirror positions indicated. Tilt the
control knob in the direction you want the mirror to
move. When you are finished adjusting the mirror,
turn the control to the center (neutral) position to
prevent accidental mirror movements.
NOTE:
Operation of the power mirrors is only available
with the ignition in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN)
position.
Power Mirror Controls
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or
ice. This feature will be activated
whenever you turn on the rear window
defroster (if equipped) Ú page 28.
CAUTION!
It is recommended to fold the mirrors into the
full rearward position to resist damage when
entering a car wash or a narrow location.
1 — Neutral Position
2 — Driver Mirror Select Position
3 — Passenger Mirror Select Position
4 — Four-Way Mirror Control Switch
2
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 23
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
MULTIFUNCTION LEVER
The multifunction lever controls the operation of
the headlights, parking lights, turn signals,
headlight beam selection and the passing lights.
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of
the steering column.
Multifunction Lever
HEADLIGHTS
To turn on the headlights, turn the end of the
multifunction lever to the headlight position. When
the headlight switch is on, the parking lights,
taillights, license plate light, clearance lights and
instrument panel lights are also turned on. To turn
off the headlights, turn the end of the multifunction
lever back to the O (off) position.
NOTE:
On vehicles sold in Canada, the rear parking lights,
clearance lights, sidemarker, plate lights and
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) will turn on when
the headlight switch is rotated to the O (off)
position.
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRLS) —
I
F EQUIPPED
The Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) will come on
whenever the ignition is in the ON position, the
headlight switch is off, and a turn signal has not
been activated.
To activate the DRLs, rotate the end of the
multifunction lever to the O (off) position.
NOTE:
For vehicles sold in Canada, the Daytime
Running Lights will automatically deactivate
when the front fog lights are turned on.
For vehicles not sold in Canada, the low beams
and side/taillights will not be on with DRLs.
In certain markets, the DRLs can be
programmed on or off through the Uconnect
system Ú page 79.
On some vehicles, the Daytime Running Lights
may deactivate, or reduce intensity, on one side
of the vehicle (when a turn signal is activated on
that side), or on both sides of the vehicle (when
the hazard warning lights are activated).
HIGH/LOW BEAM SWITCH
Pull the multifunction lever toward the steering
wheel to switch the headlights to high beams. Pull
the multifunction lever again to turn the low beams
back on.
FLASH-TO-PASS
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights
by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you.
This will cause the high beam headlights to turn on,
and remain on, until the lever is released.
PARKING LIGHTS
These lights can only be turned on with the ignition
in the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position or removed.
Move the end of the multifunction lever to O (off)
position, and then to the headlight position.
The indicator light telltale in the instrument panel
comes on. The lights stay on until the next ignition
cycle is performed.
FOLLOW ME HOME/HEADLIGHT DELAY
When this feature is selected, the driver can
choose to have the headlights remain on for a
preset period of time after the engine is turned off.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 24
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
Activation
Remove the key or turn the ignition to the STOP
(OFF/LOCK) position, and pull the multifunction
lever toward the steering wheel within two
minutes. Each time the lever is pulled, the
activation of the lights will be extended by 30
seconds. The activation of the lights can be
extended to a maximum of 210 seconds.
Deactivation
Pull the multifunction lever toward the steering
wheel and hold it for more than two seconds.
FOG LIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
The fog light switch is located on the center stack
of the instrument panel, just above the climate
controls.
Fog Light Switch Location
Push the switch once to turn the fog lights on. Push
the switch a second time to turn the fog lights off.
NOTE:
If the ignition is placed in the STOP (OFF/LOCK)
position, the fog lights will also turn off.
TURN SIGNALS
Move the multifunction lever up or down to
activate the turn signals. The arrows on each side
of the instrument cluster flash to show proper
operation.
NOTE:
If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective
outside light bulb.
LANE CHANGE ASSIST
Lightly push the multifunction lever up or down,
without moving beyond the detent, and the turn
signal will flash five times then automatically turn
off.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
COURTESY/INTERIOR LIGHTS
These lights are mounted between the sun visors
on the overhead console. Each light is turned on by
pushing the corresponding switch.
Left Switch
Push the left switch to the left to turn off the
auto dome lights. The dome lights will not auto-
matically turn on when a door is opened.
Push the left switch to the right to turn on the
dome lights.
Right Switch
Push the right switch to the left to turn on the
left map light.
Push the right switch to the right to turn on the
right map light.
Map/Dome Lights
1 — OFF
2 — AUTO/Dome
3 — Left Map
4 — Right Map
2
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 25
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Lights
Cargo Vehicle
Lateral Roof Light
This is located on the right side of the load
compartment.
Rear Roof Light
This is located on the rear panel of the load
compartment.
In auto-mode, the light comes on automatically
when you open the sliding doors and the rear swing
doors, and goes out when you close them.
Push the left-hand side of the lens to switch the
light off when the doors are open.
Push the right-hand side of the lens to switch
the light on when the doors are open.
Passenger Vehicle
The interior lamps are located in the center of the
roof, above the second row seating, and in the roof,
in the center of the rear load area.
Second Row Seating And Rear Roof Lights
Operation
In auto-mode, the light comes on automatically
when you open the rear swing doors, and goes out
when you close them.
Push the left-hand side of the lens to switch the
light off when the doors are open.
Push the right-hand side of the lens to switch
the light on when the doors are open.
Cargo Compartment Light — If Equipped
The cargo compartment light comes on
automatically when the swing doors are opened
and turns off when the doors are closed.
WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer lever is located on
the right side of the steering column. The front
wipers are operated by rotating a switch, located
on the end of the lever.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever
NOTE:
The windshield wipers/washers will only operate
with the ignition in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN)
position.
1 — Push Forward For Rear Washer
2 — Rotate For Rear Wiper Operation
3 — Rotate For Front Wiper Operation
4 — Pull For Front Washer
5 — Push Up For Mist
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 26
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
(Continued)
FRONT WIPER OPERATION
The wipers and washers are operated by a switch
within the wiper lever. Rotate the switch at the end
of the lever upward from the O (off) position to the
first detent for intermittent wiper operation. Rotate
the switch at the end of the lever upward to the
second detent for low-speed wiper operation, and
to the third detent for high-speed operation. To
turn the windshield wipers off, rotate the switch at
the end of the lever back down to the O (off)
position.
Intermittent Wiper System
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the first
detent. The wipers will operate at intermittent
speed. When the vehicle's speed increases, the
time between the wipes will decrease.
Windshield Washers
Pull the windshield wiper/washer lever rearward
toward the driver to activate the washers. The
wipers will activate automatically for three cycles
after the lever is released.
Mist
Use the Mist feature when weather conditions
make occasional usage of the wipers necessary.
Push the lever upward to the MIST position and
release for a single wiping cycle.
NOTE:
The Mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on
the windshield. The wash function must be used in
order to spray the windshield with washer fluid.
For information on wiper care and replacement,
see Ú page 197.
CAUTION!
Always remove any buildup of snow that
prevents the windshield wiper blades from
returning to the “park” position. If the windshield
wiper switch is turned off, and the blades cannot
return to the “park” position, damage to the
wiper motor may occur.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden
icing of the windshield during freezing weather,
warm the windshield with the defroster before
and during windshield washer use.
CAUTION!
Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to
the windshield wipers may result if the wiper
control is left in any position other than off.
In cold weather, always turn off the wiper
switch and allow the wipers to return to the
park position before turning off the engine. If
the wiper switch is left on and the wipers
freeze to the windshield, damage to the wiper
motor may occur when the vehicle is
restarted.
Always remove any buildup of snow that
prevents the windshield wiper blades from
returning to the off position. If the windshield
wiper control is turned off and the blades
cannot return to the off position, damage to
the wiper motor may occur.
CAUTION!
2
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 27
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
REAR WIPER AND WASHER —
I
F EQUIPPED
The rear wiper/washer is operated by rotating a
switch, located at the middle of the windshield
wiper/washer lever.
Rotate the windshield wiper lever center
ring upwards to operate the rear window
wiper as follows:
In intermittent mode when the front window
wiper is not operating
In synchronous mode (at half the speed of the
front window wiper) when the front window
wiper is operating
In continuous mode while vehicle is in REVERSE
With the windshield wipers on, and REVERSE gear
engaged, rear window wiping will be continuous in
the same way.
Rear Windshield Washer Operation
Pushing the windshield wiper lever
forward activates the rear window
washer. Keep the windshield wiper lever
pushed for more than quarter of a
second to activate the rear window wiper as well.
When the windshield wiper lever is released, the
wipers will return to normal operation.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control system allows you to regulate
the temperature, air flow, and direction of air
circulating throughout the vehicle. The controls are
located on the instrument panel below the radio.
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL
D
ESCRIPTIONS AND FUNCTIONS
Manual Climate Controls
System Maintenance
In Winter, the Climate Control system must be
turned on at least once a month for about
10 minutes.
Have the system inspected at an authorized dealer
before the Summer.
A/C Button
Push the A/C button to engage the Air
Conditioning (A/C). A LED will illuminate
when the A/C system is engaged. The
A/C can be deselected manually
without disturbing the mode control selection.
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the
operator to manually activate or deactivate the air
conditioning system. When the air conditioning
system is turned on, cool dehumidified air will flow
through the outlets into the cabin.
For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in
Mix, Floor or Defrost mode, the A/C can be
turned off, but the A/C system shall remain
active to prevent fogging of the windows.
If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side
glass, select Defrost mode, and increase blower
speed if needed.
If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the A/C
condenser (located in front of the radiator), for
an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a
gentle water spray from the front of the radiator
and through the condenser.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 28
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
(Continued)
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button to change
the system between recirculation mode
and outside air mode. The Recirculation
indicator and the A/C indicator
illuminate when the Recirculation button is
pressed. Recirculation can be used when outside
conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high
humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in
all modes. Recirculation may be unavailable
(button on the touchscreen greyed out) if
conditions exist that could create fogging on the
inside of the windshield. The A/C can be
deselected manually without disturbing the mode
control selection. Continuous use of the
Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy
and window fogging may occur. Extended use of
this mode is not recommended. Recirculation
mode may automatically adjust to optimize
customer experience for warming, cooling,
dehumidification, etc.
In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The
Recirculation feature may be unavailable if
conditions exist that could create fogging on the
inside of the windshield.
Front Defrost Setting
Use Defrost mode with maximum
temperature settings for best
windshield and side window defrosting
and defogging. Turn the knob to the
Front Defrost position. Air comes from the
windshield and side window demist outlets.
Rear Defrost Button — If Equipped
Push and release the Rear Defrost
Control button to turn on the rear
window defroster and the heated
outside mirrors (if equipped). An
indicator will illuminate when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster
automatically turns OFF after 20 minutes.
Temperature Control
Temperature Control regulates the temperature of
the air forced through the climate system.
The temperature increases as you turn
the temperature control knob clockwise.
The temperature decreases as you turn
the temperature control knob
counterclockwise.
Blower Control
There are four blower speeds. Use this
control to regulate the amount of air
forced through the system in any mode
you select. The blower speed increases
as you move the control clockwise from the OFF
position.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners
on the interior surface of the window. Use a
soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping
parallel to the heating elements. Labels can
be peeled off after soaking with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
abrasive window cleaners on the interior
surface of the window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the
window.
CAUTION!
2
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 29
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Mode Control
Rotate this control to change the airflow
distribution mode. The airflow
distribution mode can be adjusted so air
comes from the instrument panel
outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist
outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the
instrument panel. Each of these outlets
can be individually adjusted to direct the
flow of air. The air vanes of the center
outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and
down or side to side to regulate airflow direction.
There is a shut-off wheel located below the air
vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow
from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel
outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount
of air is directed through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort condi-
tions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets
and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the
defrost and side window demister
outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost,
and side window demister outlets. This
setting works best in cold or snowy
conditions that require extra heat to the
windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
comfort while reducing moisture on the
windshield.
OPERATING TIPS
Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather
conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with
a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper
corrosion protection and to protect against engine
overheating. OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) is recommended Ú page 240.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster
performance, make sure the engine cooling
system is functioning properly and the proper
amount, type, and concentration of coolant is used
Ú page 240. Use of the Air Recirculation mode
during Winter months is not recommended
because it may cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
For information on maintaining the Climate Control
system when the vehicle is being stored for an
extended period of time, see Ú page 233.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside of the
glass in mild, rainy and/or humid weather. To clear
the windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and
increase the front blower speed. Do not use the
Recirculation mode without A/C for long periods,
as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of
the windshield, is free of obstructions, such as
leaves. Leaves collected in the air intake may
reduce airflow, and if they enter the air distribution
box, they could plug the water drains. In Winter
months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 30
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
Cabin Air Filter
The Climate Control system filters out dust and
pollen from the air. Contact an authorized dealer to
service your cabin air filter, and to have it replaced
when needed.
Operating Tips Chart
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the
passenger side of the instrument panel.
To open the glove compartment, pull the release
handle.
NOTE:
The glove compartment handle is equipped with a
lock. To lock the glove compartment, insert the
mechanical key into the glove compartment
handle lock cylinder and turn the key to the lock
position and remove the key. Use the reverse
sequence to unlock the glove compartment.
Glove Compartment
Dash Storage
The dash storage is located on the right side of the
instrument panel above the glove compartment.
Dash Storage
WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS
Hot Weather And
Vehicle Interior Is Very
Hot
Set the mode control to
(Panel Mode),
(A/C) on, and blower
on high. Roll down the
windows for a minute
to flush out the hot air.
Adjust the controls as
needed to achieve
comfort.
Warm Weather
Turn (A/C) on and
set the mode control to
(Panel Mode).
Cool Sunny
Operate in
(Bi-Level Mode).
Cool & Humid
Conditions
Set the mode control to
(Mix Mode) and
turn on (A/C) to
keep windows clear.
Cold Weather
Set the mode control to
(Floor Mode). If
windshield fogging
starts to occur, move
the control to
(Mix Mode).
WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS
2
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 31
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Overhead Console Storage
There is additional shelf storage above the front
sun visors.
Overhead Console Storage Location
USB CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
The USB port is located on the instrument panel
below the Climate Controls. This feature allows an
external USB device to be plugged into the USB port.
Media Hub USB Port
NOTE:
Charge unsupported devices with the Charge Only
USB ports. If an unsupported device is plugged into
a Media USB port, a message will display on the
touchscreen that the device is not supported by
the system.
POWER OUTLETS
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (15 Amp)
power outlets that can be used to power cellular
phones, small electronics and other low powered
electrical accessories. The power outlets are
labeled with either a “key” or a “battery” symbol to
indicate how the outlet is powered. Power outlets
labeled with a key symbol are powered when the
ignition is in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position,
while the outlets labeled with a battery symbol are
connected directly to the battery and powered at
all times.
Driver And Front Passenger Power Outlets
The power outlets are located in between the
driver and front passenger seats.
Driver And Front Passenger Power Outlets
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 32
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
Load Compartment Power Outlet
The Load Compartment Power Outlet is located on
the left side of the rear cargo compartment.
Depending on trim levels, the power outlet location
may vary.
Load Compartment Power Outlet
Underhood Power Outlet Fuse Locations
CAUTION!
Do not connect devices with power higher than
180 Watts to the outlet. Using unsuitable
adapters may damage the outlet.
1 — #15 Fuse 15A Blue IP Power Outlet 12V (Key)
2 — #30 Fuse 15A Blue 2nd IP Power Outlet
12V (Battery)
3 — #85 Fuse 15A Blue Rear Power Outlet
12V (Key)
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use and while driving
the vehicle.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
CAUTION!
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle's battery, even when
not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventu-
ally, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle's
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade
battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
All accessories connected to the battery
powered outlets should be removed or turned
off when the vehicle is not in use. Leaving
devices connected overnight will drain the
vehicle’s battery.
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e.,
coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will
degrade the battery even more quickly. Only
use these intermittently and with greater
caution.
After the use of high power draw accessories,
or long periods of the vehicle not being started
(with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle
must be driven a sufficient length of time to
allow the generator to recharge the vehicle's
battery.
2
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 33
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WINDOWS
POWER WINDOW CONTROLS —
I
F EQUIPPED
The window switches on the driver’s door control
all door windows.
Power Window Switches
The passenger door windows can also be operated
by using the single window switch on the
passenger door trim panel. If the vehicle is
equipped with rear power windows, a single
opening and closing switch on the rear passenger
doors for passenger window control is provided.
NOTE:
The key off power delay feature will allow the
power windows to operate for up to three
minutes after the ignition is turned off. This
feature is canceled when either front door is
opened.
The power window switches remain active for up
to three minutes after the ignition switch has
been turned off. Opening either of the vehicle’s
front doors will cancel this feature.
Automatic Window Features
Auto-Down Feature
The driver and passenger door power window
switches have an Auto-Down feature. Push the
window switch down for a short period of time, then
release, and the window will go down automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way down
during the Auto-Down operation, pull up or push
down on the switch briefly.
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
Lift the window switch up for a short period of time
and release; the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up
during the Auto-Up operation, push down on the
switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window
switch briefly and release it when you want the
window to stop.
If the window runs into any obstacle during
auto-closure, it will reverse direction and then go
back down. Remove the obstacle and use the
window switch again to close the window.
1 — Front Window Control Switches
2 — Rear Window Lock Switch (If Equipped)
3 — Rear Window Control Switches (If Equipped)
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
or in a location accessible to children. A child
could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. To avoid personal injury be sure
to clear your arms, hands, fingers and all objects
from the window path before closing.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 34
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
Power Windows System Initialization
The power windows may be reset if any of the
following occurs:
On the front doors:
Fuse or battery are disconnected when the
window is moving
50 window movements without ever closing
the window
On the rear doors (in addition to the conditions
for the front doors):
Fuse or battery are disconnected when the
window is moving
The auto-reverse system is activated while
the window is moving and the door is
opening
50 window movements without ever closing
the window
One door opening with the window moving,
without ever closing the door
Three doors opening with the window in
motion. During these maneuvers, the upper
stop position is never reached
Proceed as follows for initialization:
1. Completely close the driver's door window,
keeping the window switch pushed for at
least five seconds after the (upper) end of
travel position.
2. Proceed in the same way on the passenger's
window switches.
Rear Window Lockout Switch — If Equipped
The window lockout switch on the driver's door trim
panel allows you to disable the window controls on
the rear passenger doors. To disable the window
controls, push and release the window lockout
button (the indicator light on the button will turn
on). To enable the window controls, push and
release the window lockout button again (the
indicator light on the button will turn off).
WINDOW BAR GRATES — IF EQUIPPED
This vehicle may be equipped with metal grates
over the sliding door windows. This feature is a part
of the vehicle’s safety system, and is designed to
protect you and your passengers in the event of an
accident.
Window Bar Grates
WIND BUFFETING
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception
of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound
in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting
with the windows down in certain open or partially
open positions. This is a normal occurrence and
can be minimized. If wind buffeting occurs, open
the front windows together to minimize the
buffeting.
WARNING!
The metal grates over the sliding door windows
are designed to protect you in the event of an
accident. Modification or removal of the grates
could lead to serious injury or death.
2
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 35
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HOOD
OPENING
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. Pull the release lever located below the
instrument panel and in front of the driver's
door.
Hood Release Lever
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle, reach into
the opening beneath the center of the hood
and push up the safety latch lever to release it,
before raising the hood.
Hood Safety Latch Lever Location
3. Raise the hood and place the hood prop rod in
hood slot to secure the hood in the open
position.
Hood Prop Rod
CLOSING
CAUTION!
Be sure to disengage the rod and secure it in
closed position before closing the hood. Damage
may occur.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving
your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it
could open when the vehicle is in motion and
block your vision. Failure to follow this warning
could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the
hood to close it. Lower hood to approximately
12 inches (30 cm) and drop the hood to close.
Make sure hood is fully closed for both latches.
Never drive vehicle unless hood is fully closed,
with both latches engaged.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 36
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
(Continued)
CARGO AREA FEATURES
REAR CARGO TIE-DOWNS
To make it easier to secure your load, there are
hooks fixed to the floor (if equipped).
Rear Cargo Tie-Downs (Cargo Version)
Rear Cargo Tie-Downs (Passenger Version)
NOTE:
Power washing is not allowed inside the cargo
area.
ROOF RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The crossbars and siderails are designed to carry
weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack.
The load must not exceed 150 lb (68 kg), and
should be uniformly distributed over the luggage
rack crossbars.
NOTE:
If not equipped with crossbars, an authorized
dealer can order and install Mopar® crossbars
built specifically for this roof rack system.
Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack
crossbars. The roof rack does not increase the
total load carrying capacity of the vehicle. Be sure
the total load of cargo inside the vehicle plus that
on the external rack does not exceed the maximum
vehicle load capacity.
WARNING!
To help protect against personal injury, passen-
gers should not be seated in the rear cargo
area. The rear cargo space is intended for load
carrying purposes only, not for passengers, who
should sit in seats and use seat belts.
Cargo tie-down hooks are not safe anchors for
a child seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or
accident, a hook could pull loose and allow the
child seat to come loose. A child could be
badly injured. Use only the anchors provided
for child seat tethers.
The weight and position of cargo and
passengers can change the vehicle’s center of
gravity and vehicle handling. To avoid loss of
control resulting in personal injury, follow these
guidelines for loading your vehicle:
Do not carry loads which exceed the load
limits described on the label attached to the
left door or left door center pillar.
Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor.
Put heavier objects as low and as far forward
as possible.
Place as much cargo as possible in front of the
rear axle. Too much weight or improperly
placed weight over or behind the rear axle can
cause the rear of the vehicle to sway.
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the
top of the seatback. This could impair visibility
or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden
stop or accident.
WARNING!
2
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 37
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
To move the crossbars, loosen the attachments,
located at the upper edge of each crossbar,
approximately eight turns using the anti-theft
wrench provided with the Mopar® crossbars.
Then, move the crossbar to the desired position,
keeping the crossbars parallel to the rack frame.
Once the crossbar is in the desired position,
re-tighten it with the wrench to lock the crossbar
into position.
NOTE:
To help control wind noise when the crossbars
are not in use, place the front and rear cross-
bars approximately 24 inches (61 cm) apart.
Optimal noise reduction can then be achieved
by adjusting the front crossbar forward or aft
using increments of 1 inch (2.5 cm).
If the crossbar (or any metallic object) is placed
over the satellite radio antenna (if equipped),
you may experience interruption of satellite
radio reception. For improved satellite radio
reception, avoid placing the rear crossbar over
the satellite radio antenna.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied down before driving
your vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off
the vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting
in personal injury or property damage. Follow
the roof rack cautions when carrying cargo on
your roof rack.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle,
DO NOT carry any loads on the roof rack
without the crossbars deployed. The load
should be secured and placed on top of the
crossbars, not directly on the roof. If it is
necessary to place the load on the roof, place
a blanket or other protective layer between
the load and the roof surface.
To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle,
do not exceed the maximum roof rack load
capacity of 150 lb (68 kg). Always distribute
heavy loads as evenly as possible and secure
the load appropriately.
Loads should always be secured to crossbars
first, with tie down loops used as additional
securing points if needed. Tie loops are
intended as supplementary tie down points
only. Do not use ratcheting mechanisms with
the tie loops. Check the straps and thumb
wheels frequently to be sure that the load
remains securely attached.
Long loads that extend over the windshield,
such as wood panels or surfboards, or loads
with large frontal area should be secured to
both the front and rear of the vehicle.
Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners
carefully when carrying large or heavy loads
on the roof rack. Wind forces, due to natural
causes or nearby truck traffic, can add sudden
upward lift to a load. This is especially true on
large flat loads and may result in damage to
the cargo or your vehicle.
CAUTION!
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 38
39
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
3
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 39
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
2. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the
fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the
ON/RUN position.
The fuel pump arrow symbol
points to the side of the vehicle
where the fuel door is located.
3.Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine
coolant temperature. Any reading within the
normal range indicates that the engine
cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The pointer will likely indicate a higher
temperature when driving in hot weather or
up mountain grades. It should not be
allowed to exceed the upper limits of the
normal operating range.
4. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (RPM x 1000).
5. Instrument Cluster Display
When the appropriate conditions exist, this
display shows the instrument cluster
display messages Ú page 40.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle will be equipped with an instrument
cluster display, which offers useful information to
the driver. With the ignition in the OFF mode,
opening/closing of a door will activate the display
for viewing, and display the total miles, or
kilometers, in the odometer. The steering wheel
mounted controls allow you to scroll through the
main menus and submenus. You can access the
specific information you want and make selections
and adjustments.
LOCATION AND CONTROLS
The instrument cluster display features a driver
interactive display that is located in the instrument
cluster.
Instrument Cluster Display Location
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized
dealer for service if your vehicle overheats
Ú page 201.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge
reads “H,” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the
vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
the pointer drops back into the normal range. If
the pointer remains on the “H,” turn the engine
off immediately and call an authorized dealer for
service.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 40
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 41
The menu items described below are an example
of what can be found in the vehicle's menu:
Dimmer
Speed Beep
Trip A / B (options are selectable through the
steering wheel stalk)
Buzzer Volume
The system allows the driver to select information
by pushing the following buttons mounted on the
instrument panel to the right of the steering
column:
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
MENU Button
Push and release the
MENU button for a time
longer than one second to access/select the
information screens or submenu screens of a
main menu item. Push and hold the
MENU
button for two seconds to reset displayed/
selected features that can be reset.
Up And Down Arrow Buttons:
Using the
up or down arrow button allows
you to cycle through the Main Menu Items.
NOTE:
If equipped with a Uconnect system, some of the
menu items will be present in the radio head unit
Ú page 79.
Dimmer:
With headlights on and without entering in the
menu, push the
up or down arrow button to
increase or decrease the brightness of the
instrument panel, graphics and command buttons.
Selecting An Option Of The Main Menu With
Submenu:
1. Briefly push and release the
MENU
button to
display the first submenu option.
2. Push and release the up or down arrow
button (by single pushes) to scroll through all
the submenu options.
3. Briefly push and release the
MENU button to
select the displayed submenu option and to
open the relevant setup menu.
4. Push and release the
up or down arrow
button (by single pushes) to select the new
setting for this submenu option.
5. Briefly push and release the
MENU button to
store the new setting and go back to the
previously selected submenu option.
6. Push and hold the
MENU button to return to
the main menu (short hold) or the main screen
(longer hold).
CHANGE ENGINE OIL — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with an engine oil
change indicator system. The “Change Engine Oil”
message will display in the instrument cluster
display. The engine oil change indicator system is
duty cycle based, which means the engine oil
change interval may fluctuate, dependent upon
your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display
each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/
RUN position. To turn off the message temporarily,
push and release the
MENU button. To reset the oil
change indicator system (after performing the
scheduled maintenance), refer to the following
procedure.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (do
not start the engine).
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal slowly, three
times, within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
3
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 41
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you start
the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY MENU
I
TEMS
Speed Beep
This function is used to set a speed limit (MPH or
km/h); the driver is alerted when this limit is
exceeded.
To set the desired speed limit:
1. Push the
MENU
button briefly. The display will
show the wording (SPEED BEEP) and the unit
(MPH) or (km/h) previously set.
2. If the function is on, push and release the up
or
down arrow button to select the required
speed limit and then push
MENU to confirm.
NOTE:
The speed may be set in the range from 20 to
125 mph (30 to 200 km/h) according to the previ-
ously chosen unit.
The setting will increase/decrease by five units
each time the
up or down arrow button is
pushed. Hold down the
up or down arrow
button to automatically increase/decrease the
setting rapidly. Complete the adjustment when you
approach the desired value.
Push the
MENU button briefly to return to the menu
screen or hold the
MENU button down to return to
the standard screen without storing.
To cancel the setting:
1. Briefly push the
MENU
button, “ON” will flash
in the display.
2. Push the down arrow button, “OFF” will
flash in the display.
3. Push the
MENU button briefly to return to the
menu screen or hold the
MENU button down to
return to the standard screen without storing.
Trip B Data
This function can be used to activate (On) or
deactivate (Off) the Trip B display (Partial Trip)
Ú page 43.
To switch the function On/Off:
1. Push the
MENU
button briefly. The display will
flash On or Off according to the previous
setting.
2. Push and release the up or down arrow
button to select.
Push the
MENU button briefly to return to the menu
screen or hold the
MENU button down to return to
the standard screen without storing.
Buzzer Volume
With this function, the volume of the acoustic
signal which accompanies the display of failure/
warning can be adjusted according to seven levels.
To set the desired volume:
1. Push the
MENU
button, the previously set
volume level will flash on the display.
2. Push and release the up or down arrow
button to adjust.
3. Push the
MENU button to return to the menu
screen or hold the
MENU button down to
return to the standard screen without storing.
Seat Belt Buzzer
Only shows in the instrument cluster display if the
seat belt reminder was previously deactivated by
an authorized dealer.
NOTE:
This is a one-time occurrence to enable the
acoustic signal.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 42
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 43
Exit Menu
This is the last function that closes the cycle of
settings listed in the menu screen.
1. Pushing the
MENU
button briefly will return
the display to the standard screen without
storing.
2. Push the down arrow button to return to the
first menu item on the display.
TRIP COMPUTER
The Trip Computer is located in the instrument
cluster. It features a driver interactive display
(displays information such as trip information,
range, fuel consumption, average speed, and
travel time).
NOTE:
The Uconnect System also has a Trip Computer
display and menus to customize the information
displayed in the cluster Ú page 79.
TRIP BUTTON
The
TRIP button, located on the right steering
column stalk, can be used to display and to reset
the previously described values.
A short button push displays the different values.
A long button push resets the system and then
starts a new trip.
New Trip
To reset:
Push and hold the TRIP button to reset the
system manually.
When the “Trip distance” reaches
99999.9 miles or kilometers or when the
“Travel time” reaches 999.59 (999 hours and
59 minutes), the system is reset automatically.
Disconnecting/Reconnecting the battery resets
the system.
NOTE:
If the reset operation occurs in the presence of the
screens concerning Trip A or Trip B, only the infor-
mation associated with Trip A or Trip B functions
will be reset.
Start Of Trip Procedure
With the ignition on, push and hold the TRIP button
for over two seconds to reset trip information.
Exit Trip
1. To exit the Trip function, wait until all the
values have been displayed or hold the
MENU
button for longer than one second.
2. Briefly push and release the MENU button to
go back to the menu screen or push and hold
the
MENU button (approximately one second)
to go back to the main screen without storing
settings.
TRIP FUNCTIONS
Both trip functions are resettable (reset — start of
new trip).
“Trip A” can be used to display the figures relating to:
Range
Trip distance A
Average Economy A
Instantaneous Economy
Average speed A
Travel time A (driving time)
3
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 43
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
“Trip B” can be used to display the figures relating to:
Trip distance B
Average Economy B
Average speed B
Travel time B (driving time)
NOTE:
“Trip B” functions may be excluded (see “Trip B
Data”). Range and Instantaneous Economy cannot
be reset.
VALUES DISPLAYED
Range
This indicates the distance which may be traveled
with the fuel remaining in the tank, assuming that
driving conditions will not change. The message “----”
will appear on the display in the following cases:
Distance less than 30 miles (or 50 km).
The vehicle is parked for a long time with the
engine running.
NOTE:
The range depends on several factors: driving
style, type of route (freeway, residential, mountain
roads, etc.), conditions of use of the vehicle (load,
tire pressure, etc.). Trip planning must take into
account the above notes.
Travel Distance
This value shows the distance covered since the
last reset.
Average Fuel Consumption
This value shows the approximate average
consumption since the last reset.
Current Fuel Consumption
This indicates the fuel consumption. The value is
constantly updated. The message “----” will appear
on the display if the vehicle is parked with the
engine running.
Average Speed
This value shows the vehicle's average speed as a
function of the overall time elapsed since the last
reset.
Travel Time
This value shows the time elapsed since the last
reset.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the
instrument panel together with a dedicated
message and/or acoustic signal when applicable.
These indications are indicative and precautionary
and as such must not be considered as exhaustive
and/or alternative to the information contained in
the Owner’s Manual, which you are advised to read
carefully in all cases. Always refer to the information
in this chapter in the event of a failure indication. All
active telltales will display first if applicable. The
system check menu may appear different based
upon equipment options and current vehicle status.
Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
RED WARNING LIGHTS
Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
MAR/ON/RUN position. If the light is
either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on
while driving, have the system inspected by an
authorized dealer as soon as possible. This light
will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with
the Air Bag Warning Light has been detected, it will
stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes
on intermittently or remains on while driving, have
an authorized dealer service the vehicle
immediately.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 44
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 45
Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various
brake functions, including brake fluid
level and parking brake application. If
the brake light turns on it may indicate
that the parking brake is applied, that the brake
fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the
Anti-Lock Brake System reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has
been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full
mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates
a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or
that a problem with the Brake Booster has been
detected by the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) /
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this
case, the light will remain on until the condition has
been corrected. If the problem is related to the
brake booster, the ABS pump will run when
applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation
may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking
capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the
hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual
brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning
Light, which will turn on when the brake fluid level
in the master cylinder has dropped below a
specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level
conditions. The vehicle should have service
performed, and the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is
necessary.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake
Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD
failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on along
with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS
system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be
checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF
position to the ON/RUN position. The light should
illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light
should then turn off unless the parking brake is
applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light does
not illuminate, have the light inspected by an
authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake
is applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN
position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake appli-
cation.
Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when
the battery is not charging properly. If it
stays on while the engine is running,
there may be a malfunction with the
charging system. Contact an authorized dealer as
soon as possible. This indicates a possible
problem with the electrical system or a related
component.
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when one or
more door(s) are not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving and a door is opened, there
will also be a single chime.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have
failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You
could have a collision. Have the vehicle checked
immediately.
3
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 45
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate to
inform of a problem with the ETC
system. If a problem is detected while
the vehicle is running, the light will
either stay on or flash depending on the nature of
the problem. Cycle the ignition when the vehicle is
safely and completely stopped and the
transmission is placed in the PARK (P) position.
The light should turn off. If the light remains on with
the vehicle running, your vehicle will usually be
drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for
service as soon as possible.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is
running, immediate service is required and you
may experience reduced performance, an
elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
vehicle may require towing. The light will come on
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or MAR/
ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as a bulb
check. If the light does not come on during starting,
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
Light
This warning light warns of an
overheated engine condition. If the
engine coolant temperature is too high,
this indicator will illuminate and a single
chime will sound. If the temperature reaches the
upper limit, a continuous chime will sound for four
minutes or until the engine is able to cool,
whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over
and stop the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning (A/C)
system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission
into NEUTRAL (N) and idle the vehicle. If the
temperature reading does not return to normal,
turn the engine off immediately and call for service
Ú page 183.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate low engine oil pressure. If the
light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle, shut off the engine as soon as
possible, and contact an authorized dealer. A
chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is
corrected. This light does not indicate how much oil
is in the engine. The engine oil level must be
checked under the hood.
Transmission Temperature Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to warn
of a high transmission fluid
temperature. This may occur with
strenuous usage such as trailer towing.
If this light turns on, stop the vehicle and run the
engine at idle or slightly faster, with the
transmission in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N), until the
light turns off. Once the light turns off, you may
continue to drive normally.
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
When the ignition is first placed in the
ON/RUN or MAR/ON/RUN position, if
the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a
chime will sound and the light will turn
on. When driving, if the driver or front passenger
seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously
and a chime will sound Ú page 137.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is
illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over,
come in contact with hot engine or exhaust
components and cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission
Temperature Warning Light illuminated will
eventually cause severe transmission damage
or transmission failure.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 46
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 47
Transmission Fault Warning Light
This light will illuminate (together with a
message in the instrument cluster
display and a buzzer) to indicate a
transmission fault. Contact an
authorized dealer if the message remains after
restarting the engine.
Engine Oil Level Warning Light
This warning light appears on the panel
when the engine oil level falls below the
minimum recommended value. Restore
the correct engine oil level or contact an
authorized dealer for service.
YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
This light monitors the ABS. The light will
turn on when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN or MAR/ON/RUN position and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while
driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and service is required.
However, the conventional brake system will
continue to operate normally if the brake warning
light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be
serviced as soon as possible to restore the
benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS light does
not turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/
RUN or MAR/ON/RUN position, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches
approximately 2–3 gal (9–11 L) this
light will turn on, and remain on until
fuel is added.
Generic Warning Light
The Generic Warning Light will
illuminate if any of the following
conditions occur: Engine Oil Pressure
Sensor Failure, External Light Failure,
Parking Sensor Failure, Fuel Cut-Off Fail/
Intervention, Generic Failure on Trailer, or Air Bag
telltale recovery.
The telltale will blink in case of an Air Bag Warning
Light Failure. Contact an authorized dealer
immediately for service.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a
message is displayed to indicate that
the tire pressure is lower than the
recommended value and/or that slow
pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal
tire duration and fuel consumption may not be
guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition
mentioned above, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the
inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle
manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label. If your vehicle has tires of a different
size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or
tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat
tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the
vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a
tire puncture occurs, repair immediately using
the dedicated tire repair kit and contact an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
3
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 47
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a TPMS that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is
significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low
tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and
check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them
to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly
underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can
lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even
if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system
is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction
indicator is combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a malfunction,
the telltale will flash for approximately one minute
and then remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle
start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When
the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
system may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may
occur for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS to continue to function properly.
Vehicle Security Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when
the vehicle security system has
detected an attempt to break into the
vehicle.
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Warning Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard
Diagnostic System called OBD II that
monitors engine and automatic
transmission control systems. This warning light will
illuminate when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position
before engine start. After placing the ignition to the
ON/RUN position, if there is a problem with the Sentry
Key System, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on.
This condition will result in the engine being shut off
after two seconds. If the bulb does not come on when
turning the ignition switch from OFF to ON/RUN, have
the condition checked promptly.
NOTE:
This warning light will illuminate when the vehicle
security system has detected an attempt to break
into the vehicle.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas
cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light
after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if
the light stays on through several typical driving
styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive
normally and will not require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert
serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss
of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The
vehicle should be serviced by an authorized dealer as
soon as possible if this occurs.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures
and warning have been established for the tire
size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable
system operation or sensor damage may result
when using replacement equipment that is not
of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket
wheels can cause sensor damage. Using
aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to
become inoperable. After using an aftermarket
tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your
sensor function checked.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 48
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 49
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Warning
Light — If Equipped
The ESC Indicator Light in the
instrument cluster will come on when
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
MAR/ON/RUN position, and when ESC
is activated. It should go out with the engine
running. If the ESC Indicator Light comes on
continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system.
If this light remains on after several ignition cycles,
and the vehicle has been driven several miles
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph
(48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as
possible to have the problem diagnosed and
corrected.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC Indi-
cator Light come on momentarily each time the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or MAR/ON/
RUN position.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or
MAR/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, even
if it was turned off previously.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
This light will come on when the vehicle is in an
ESC event.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the ESC is off.
Each time the ignition is turned to
ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC
system will be on, even if it was turned
off previously.
GREEN INDICATOR LIGHTS
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is
activated, the turn signal indicator will
flash independently and the
corresponding exterior turn signal lamps
will flash. Turn signals can be activated when the
multifunction lever is moved down (left) or up
(right).
NOTE:
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is
driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on.
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if
either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when
the parking lights or headlights are
turned on Ú page 24.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when
the front fog lights are on Ú page 24.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as
referenced above, can reach higher
temperatures than in normal operating
conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could
result in death or serious injury to the driver,
occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the
vehicle control system. It also could affect fuel
economy and driveability. If the MIL is flashing,
severe catalytic converter damage and power
loss will soon occur. Immediate service is
required.
3
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 49
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Cruise Control Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when
the cruise control is activated
Ú page 60.
NOTE:
There will be no change in the indicator light when
the desired speed is set.
BLUE INDICATOR LIGHTS
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to
indicate that the high beam headlights
are on. With the low beams activated,
push the multifunction lever forward
(toward the front of the vehicle) to turn on the high
beams. Pull the multifunction lever rearward
(toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn off the high
beams. If the high beams are off, pull the lever
toward you for a temporary high beam on, “flash to
pass” scenario.
WHITE INDICATOR LIGHTS
Speed Warning Indicator Light —
If Equipped
When Set Speed Warning is turned on,
the speed warning telltale will illuminate
in the instrument cluster with a number
matching the set speed. When the set
speed is exceeded, a single chime will sound along
with pop-up message of speed warning exceeded.
Speed Warning can be turned on and off in the
instrument cluster display Ú page 40.
NOTE:
The number “55” is only an example of a speed
that can be set.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated
Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II. This
system monitors the performance of the
emissions, engine, and transmission control
systems. When these systems are operating
properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine
emissions well within current government
regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II
system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes and other
information to assist your service technician in
making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually
be drivable and not need towing, see an authorized
dealer for service as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control
system. It could also affect fuel economy and
driveability. The vehicle must be serviced
before any emissions tests can be performed.
If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is
running, severe catalytic converter damage
and power loss will soon occur. Immediate
service is required.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 50
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 51
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
(OBD II) CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle is required to have an OBD II and a
connection port to allow access to information
related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may need
to access this information to assist with the
diagnosis and service of your vehicle and
emissions system Ú page 78.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to
pass an inspection of your vehicle's emissions
control system. Failure to pass could prevent
vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection
and Maintenance (I/M), this check
verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) is functioning and is not on when
the engine is running, and that the OBD II system
is ready for testing.
The OBD ll may not be ready if your vehicle was
recently serviced, recently had a depleted battery
or a battery replacement. If the OBD ll system
should be determined not ready for the I/M test,
your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station.
To check if your vehicle's OBD II system is ready,
you must do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position,
but do not crank or start the engine.
NOTE:
If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the
ON position, you will see the MIL symbol come
on as part of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two
things will happen:
The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and
then return to being fully illuminated until you
turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This
means that your vehicle's OBD II system is
not
ready and you should not proceed to the I/M
station.
The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off
position or start the engine. This means that
your vehicle's OBD II system is
ready and you
can proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is
not ready, you should see
an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your
vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery
failure or replacement, you may need to do nothing
more than drive your vehicle as you normally would
in order for your OBD II system to update. A
recheck with the above test routine may then
indicate that the system is
now ready.
WARNING!
ONLY an authorized service technician should
connect equipment to the OBD II connection
port in order to read the VIN, diagnose, or
service your vehicle.
If unauthorized equipment is connected to the
OBD II connection port, such as a
driver-behavior tracking device, it may:
Be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be
impaired or a loss of vehicle control could
occur that may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
Access, or allow others to access, infor-
mation stored in your vehicle systems,
including personal information.
3
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 51
52
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat,
adjust both inside and outside mirrors, and fasten
your seat belts.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
The gear selector must be in the PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N) position before you can start the
engine. Press the brake pedal before shifting to
any driving gear.
NOTE:
You must press the brake pedal before shifting out
of PARK.
NORMAL STARTING
Turn the ignition switch to the AVV (START) position
and release it when the engine starts. If the engine
fails to start within 10 seconds, turn the ignition
switch to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position, wait 10 to
15 seconds, then repeat this procedure.
COLD WEATHER OPERATION
To ensure reliable starting at low temperatures,
use of an externally powered electric engine block
heater (available from an authorized dealer) is
recommended.
To prevent possible engine damage while starting
at low temperatures, this vehicle will inhibit engine
cranking when the ambient temperature is less
than -31°F (-35° C) and the oil temperature
sensor reading indicates an engine block heater
has not been used. The message “Plug In Engine
Heater” will be displayed in the instrument cluster
when the ambient temperature is below -25°F
(-32° C) at the time the engine is shut off as a
reminder.
EXTENDED PARK STARTING
NOTE:
Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle
has not been started or driven for at least 30 days.
1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to
the battery to ensure a full battery charge
during the crank cycle.
2. Place the ignition in the AVV (START) position
and release it when the engine starts.
3. If the engine fails to start within ten seconds,
place the ignition in the STOP (OFF/LOCK)
position, wait 10 to 15 seconds to allow the
starter to cool, then repeat the Extended Park
Starting procedure.
4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts,
allow the starter to cool for at least
10 minutes, then repeat the procedure.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended
is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the transmis-
sion gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children). A child
could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank
continuously for more than 10 seconds at a
time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 52
STARTING AND OPERATING 53
IF ENGINE FAILS TO START
If the engine fails to start after you have followed
the “Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather”
procedure, and has not experienced an extended
park condition as identified in “Extended Park
Starting” procedure, it may be flooded. Push the
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold
it there. Crank the engine for no more than 10
seconds. This should clear any excess fuel in case
the engine is flooded. Leave the ignition key in the
MAR (ON/RUN) position, release the accelerator
pedal and repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
AFTER STARTING
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it
will decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine and
permits quicker starts in cold weather.
Connect the cord to a 110-115 Volt AC electrical
outlet with a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
For ambient temperatures below 0°F (-18°C), the
engine block heater is recommended. For ambient
temperatures below -20°F (-29°C), the engine
block heater is required.
The engine block heater cord is routed under the
hood, behind to the driver’s side headlamp. Follow
the steps below to properly use the engine block
heater:
1. Locate the engine block heater cord (behind
the driver’s side headlamp).
2. Undo the hook-and-loop strap that secures the
heater cord in place.
3. Pull the cord to the front of the vehicle and
plug it into a grounded, three-wire extension
cord.
4. After the vehicle is running, reattach the cord
to the hook-and-loop strap and properly stow
away behind the driver’s side headlamp.
NOTE:
The engine block heater cord is a factory
installed option. If your vehicle is not equipped,
heater cords are available from an authorized
dealer.
The engine block heater will require 110 Volts
AC and 6.5 Amps to activate the heater
element.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at
least one hour to have an adequate warming
effect on the engine.
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an
attempt to start the vehicle. This could result
in flash fire causing serious personal injury.
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to
get it started. Vehicles equipped with an auto-
matic transmission cannot be started this
way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic
converter and once the engine has started,
ignite and damage the converter and vehicle.
If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a start
from a booster battery or the battery in
another vehicle. This type of start can be
dangerous if done improperly Ú page 181.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not
continuously crank the engine for more than 10
seconds at a time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before
trying again.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block
heater cord before driving. Damage to the
110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause
electrocution.
4
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 53
54 STARTING AND OPERATING
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine
and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your
vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles
(500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km),
speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are
desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within
the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good
break-in. Wide-open throttle acceleration in low
gear can be detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory
is a high-quality energy conserving type lubricant.
Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated
climate conditions under which vehicle operations
will occur. For the recommended viscosity and
quality grades Ú page 240.
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its first
few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in
and not interpreted as a concern. Please check
your oil level with the engine oil indicator often
during the break-in period. Add oil as required.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the
parking brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to
leave an automatic transmission in PARK.
The parking brake lever is located in the center
console. To apply the parking brake, pull the lever
up as firmly as possible. To release the parking
brake, pull the lever up slightly, push the center
button, then lower the lever completely.
Parking Brake
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch in the ON position, the Brake Warning Light
in the instrument cluster display will illuminate.
NOTE:
When the parking brake is applied and the auto-
matic transmission is placed in gear, the Brake
Warning Light will flash. If vehicle speed is
detected, a chime will sound to alert the driver.
Fully release the parking brake before
attempting to move the vehicle.
This light only shows that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake
application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade
and away from the curb on an uphill grade. For
vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission,
apply the parking brake before placing the gear
selector in PARK, otherwise the load on the
transmission locking mechanism may make it
difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied whenever
the driver is not in the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral
Oil in the engine or damage may result.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 54
STARTING AND OPERATING 55
(Continued)
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
WARNING!
When exiting the vehicle, always remove the
key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended
is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children. A child
could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to
brake failure and a collision.
Always fully apply the parking brake when
leaving your vehicle or it may roll and cause
damage or injury. Also, be certain to leave an
automatic transmission in PARK. Failure to do
so may cause the vehicle to roll and cause
damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on
with the parking brake released, a brake system
malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system
serviced by an authorized dealer immediately.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or
something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all
vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while
the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle
always come to a complete stop, then apply
the parking brake, shift the transmission into
PARK, turn the engine OFF, and remove the
ignition key. Once the key is removed, the
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the
vehicle against unwanted movement.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
ignition key from the vehicle and lock the
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the transmis-
sion gear selector.
Do not leave the ignition key in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
dren). A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
WARNING!
4
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 55
56 STARTING AND OPERATING
KEY IGNITION PARK INTERLOCK
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park
Interlock which requires the transmission to be in
PARK before the ignition can be turned to the full
STOP (OFF/LOCK) (key removal) position. The key
can only be removed from the ignition when the
ignition is in the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position, and
once removed, the transmission is locked in PARK.
BRAKE/TRANSMISSION SHIFT
I
NTERLOCK (BTSI) SYSTEM
This vehicle is equipped with a BTSI that holds the
transmission gear selector in PARK unless the
brakes are applied. To shift the transmission out of
PARK, the ignition must be in the MAR (ON/RUN)
position (engine running or not) and the brake
pedal must be pressed.
The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from
NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle
is stopped or moving at low speeds.
9-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
The transmission gear range (PRND) is displayed
both beside the gear selector and in the
instrument cluster display. To select a gear range,
push the lock button on the gear selector and
move the lever rearward or forward. You must also
press the brake pedal to shift the transmission out
of PARK (or NEUTRAL, when the vehicle is stopped
or moving at low speeds). Select the DRIVE range
for normal driving.
NOTE:
In the event of a mismatch between the gear
selector position and the actual transmission gear
(for example, driver selects REVERSE while driving
forward), the position indicator will blink continu-
ously until the selector is returned to the proper
position, or the requested shift can be completed.
The electronically controlled transmission adapts
its shift schedule based on driver inputs, along
with environmental and road conditions. The
transmission electronics are self-calibrating;
therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may
be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition,
and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles or kilometers.
The 9-speed transmission has been developed to
meet the needs of current and future FWD/AWD
vehicles. Software and calibration is refined to
optimize the customer’s driving experience and
fuel economy. By design, some vehicle and
driveline combinations utilize NINTH gear only in
very specific driving situations and conditions.
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when
the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is
stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake
pedal when shifting between these gears.
The transmission gear selector provides PARK,
REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and Electronic Range
Select (ERS) shift positions. Manual downshifts can
be made using the ERS shift control. Moving the gear
selector into the ERS “-”/”+” position (beside the
DRIVE position) activates ERS mode, displays the
current gear in the instrument cluster, and prevents
automatic upshifts beyond this gear. In ERS mode,
toggling the gear selector forward “-” or rearward “+”
will change the highest available gear
Ú
page 59.
NOTE:
If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK,
REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed
forward) it is probably in the ERS “+”/”-” position
(beside the DRIVE position). In ERS mode, the
transmission gear limit (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in
the instrument cluster. Move the gear selector to
the right (into the DRIVE [D] position) for access to
PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
CAUTION!
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above
idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 56
STARTING AND OPERATING 57
(Continued)
(Continued)
Gear Selector
Gear Ranges
Do not press the accelerator pedal when shifting
out of PARK or NEUTRAL.
NOTE:
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before acceler-
ating. This is especially important when the engine
is cold.
PARK (P)
The engine can be started in this range. Never
attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion.
If necessary, apply the parking brake prior to
placing the vehicle in PARK.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake
before shifting the transmission to PARK,
otherwise the load on the transmission locking
mechanism may make it difficult to move the gear
selector out of PARK. As an added precaution, turn
the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
Apply the parking brake.
Shift the transmission into PARK.
Turn the engine off.
Remove the ignition key.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substitute
for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle to
guard against vehicle movement and possible
injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the gear selector out of PARK with the
brake pedal released. Make sure the trans-
mission is in PARK before exiting the vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or
something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all
vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while
the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle
always come to a complete stop, then apply
the parking brake, shift the transmission into
PARK, turn the engine off, and remove the
ignition key. Once the key is removed, the
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the
vehicle against unwanted movement.
When exiting the vehicle, always remove the
ignition key from the vehicle and lock the
vehicle.
WARNING!
4
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 57
58 STARTING AND OPERATING
The following indicators should be used to ensure
that you have properly engaged the transmission
into the PARK position:
When shifting into PARK, push the lock button
on the gear selector and firmly move the gear
selector all the way forward until it stops and is
fully seated.
Look at the transmission gear position display
and verify that it indicates the PARK position.
With brake pedal released, verify that the gear
selector will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward.
Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come
to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for
prolonged periods with the engine running. Apply
the parking brake and shift the transmission into
PARK if you must exit the vehicle.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and
highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts
and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The
transmission automatically upshifts through all
forward gears.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such
as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading
conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong
head winds, or while towing a heavy trailer), use
the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control to
select a lower gear range Ú page 59. Under these
conditions, using a lower gear range will improve
performance and extend transmission life by
reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
If the transmission temperature exceeds normal
operating limits, the transmission controller may
modify the transmission shift schedule, reduce
engine torque, and/or expand the range of torque
converter clutch engagement. This is done to
prevent transmission damage due to overheating.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the transmis-
sion gear selector.
Do not leave the ignition key in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
dren). A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Before moving the transmission gear selector
out of PARK, you must turn the ignition to the
ON/RUN position, and also press the brake
pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector
could result.
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as
this can damage the drivetrain.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing
traffic or road conditions. You might lose control
of the vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any
other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL
can cause severe transmission damage.
For Recreational Towing Ú page 75.
For Towing A Disabled Vehicle Ú page 187.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 58
STARTING AND OPERATING 59
If the transmission becomes extremely hot, the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light may
illuminate and the transmission may operate
differently until the transmission cools down.
During cold temperatures, transmission
operation may be modified depending on engine
and transmission temperature as well as vehicle
speed. This feature improves warm up time of the
engine and transmission to achieve maximum
efficiency. Engagement of the torque converter
clutch, and shifts into EIGHTH or NINTH gear, are
inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm
Ú
page 59. Normal operation will resume once
the transmission temperature has risen to a
suitable level.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically
for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected
that could result in transmission damage,
Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated. In this
mode, the transmission may operate only in a fixed
gear, or may remain in NEUTRAL. The Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. Limp
Home Mode may allow the vehicle to be driven to
an authorized dealer for service without damaging
the transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the
transmission can be reset to regain all forward
gears by performing the following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition OFF.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the
problem is no longer detected, the
transmission will return to normal operation.
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend
that you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest
possible convenience. An authorized dealer has diag-
nostic equipment to assess the condition of your
transmission. If the transmission cannot be reset,
authorized dealer service is required.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has
been included in the automatic transmission on
your vehicle. A clutch within the torque converter
engages automatically at calibrated speeds. This
may result in a slightly different feeling or response
during normal operation in the upper gears. When
the vehicle speed drops or during some
accelerations, the clutch automatically
disengages.
NOTE:
The torque converter clutch will not engage until
the transmission fluid is warm [usually after 1 to
3 miles (2 to 5 km) of driving]. Because the engine
speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is
not engaged, it may seem as if the transmission is
not shifting properly when cold. This is normal. The
torque converter clutch will function normally once
the transmission is sufficiently warm.
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
The ERS shift control allows the driver to limit the
highest available gear. For example, if you set the
transmission gear limit to FIFTH gear, the
transmission will not shift above FIFTH gear, but
will shift through the lower gears normally.
You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at
any vehicle speed. When the gear selector is in the
DRIVE position, the transmission will operate
automatically, shifting between all available gears.
Moving the gear selector to the ERS position (beside
DRIVE) will activate ERS mode, display the current
gear in the instrument cluster, and set that gear as
the top available gear. Once in ERS mode, moving
the gear selector forward “-” or rearward “+” will
change the top available gear, which will be
displayed in the instrument cluster.
To exit ERS mode, simply return the gear selector
to the DRIVE position.
4
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 59
60 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
To select the proper gear position for maximum
deceleration (engine braking), move the gear
selector into the ERS position, then simply press
and hold it forward “-”. The transmission will shift
to the range from which the vehicle can best be
slowed down.
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system provides
increased vehicle response and ease of
maneuverability. The system will provide
mechanical steering capability if power assist is
lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted,
it will still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under
these conditions, you will observe a substantial
increase in steering effort, especially at very low
vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers.
NOTE:
Increased noise levels at the end of the steering
wheel travel are considered normal and do not
indicate that there is a problem with the power
steering system.
Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power
steering pump may make noise for a short
amount of time. This is due to the cold, thick
fluid in the steering system. This noise should
be considered normal, and it does not in any
way damage the steering system.
POWER STEERING FLUID CHECK
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should
only be checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal
noises are apparent, and/or the system is not
functioning as anticipated. Coordinate inspection
efforts through an authorized dealer.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper
indicated level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled
fluid from all surfaces Ú page 241.
CRUISE CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Cruise Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than
25 mph (40 km/h).
The Cruise Control buttons are located on the right
side of the steering wheel.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking
on a slippery surface. The drive wheels could
lose their grip and the vehicle could skid,
causing a collision or personal injury.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at
the end of the steering wheel travel will increase
the steering fluid temperature and it should be
avoided when possible. Damage to the power
steering pump may occur.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface
and with the engine off to prevent injury from
moving parts and to ensure accurate fluid level
reading. Do not overfill. Use only the
manufacturer recommended power steering
fluid.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power
steering system as the chemicals can damage
your power steering components. Such damage
is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 60
STARTING AND OPERATING 61
Cruise Control Buttons
TO ACTIVATE
Push the on/off button to activate the Cruise
Control. The cruise indicator light in the instrument
cluster display will illuminate. To turn the system
off, push the on/off button a second time. The
cruise indicator light will turn off. The system
should be turned off when not in use.
TO SET A DESIRED SPEED
Turn the Cruise Control on. When the vehicle has
reached the desired speed greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h), push the SET (-) button and release.
Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed.
NOTE:
The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pushing the SET (-)
button.
TO VARY THE SPEED SETTING
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
When the Cruise Control is set, you can increase
speed by pushing the RES
(+) button, or decrease
the speed by pushing the SET
(-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the RES
(+) or SET (-) button once will
result in a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
adjustment of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust until the button is
released, then the new set speed will be estab-
lished.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the RES
(+) or SET (-) button once will
result in a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
adjustment of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust until the button is
released, then the new set speed will be estab-
lished.
TO ACCELERATE FOR PASSING
While the Cruise Control is set, press the
accelerator to pass as you would normally. When
the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the
set speed.
1 — On/Off
2 — CAN/Cancel
3 — RES (+)/Resume/Accel
4 — SET (–)/Set Speed/Decel
WARNING!
Leaving the Cruise Control system on when not
in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set
the system or cause it to go faster than you
want. You could lose control and have an
accident. Always leave the system off when you
are not using it.
4
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 61
62 STARTING AND OPERATING
Using Cruise Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to
maintain the vehicle set speed.
NOTE:
The Cruise Control system maintains speed up and
down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills
is normal. On steep hills, a greater speed loss or
gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive
without Cruise Control.
TO RESUME SPEED
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
button and release. Resume can be used at any
speed above 20 mph (32 km/h) up to the
maximum speed of 100 mph (160 km/h).
TO DEACTIVATE
A tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CAN button,
or normal brake pressure will deactivate the Cruise
Control system without erasing the set speed from
memory.
Pushing the on/off button or turning the ignition
switch off erases the set speed from memory.
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense system provides an audible
indication of the distance between the rear fascia/
bumper and a detected obstacle when backing up
(e.g. during a parking maneuver) Ú page 64.
The ParkSense system is automatically activated
when the transmission is placed into REVERSE. As
the distance from an obstacle behind the vehicle
decreases, the audible alert becomes more frequent.
Interaction With Trailer Towing
The ParkSense system is automatically
deactivated when a trailer equipped by Mopar® is
hitched to the vehicle. The system will be
automatically activated as soon as the trailer is
removed. If it does not happen, turning the key
ignition switch to STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and
then to AVV (START) again would be needed. If a
non-Mopar® trailer hitch is mounted, the sensor
deactivation cannot be guaranteed.
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST
S
ENSORS
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear
fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle
that is within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors
can detect obstacles, in the horizontal direction,
from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to
55 inches (140 cm) from the center of the rear
fascia/bumper and up to 24 inches (60 cm) from
the corners of the rear fascia/bumper, depending on
the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
ParkSense Rear Park Assist Sensors Locations
If several obstacles are detected, the ParkSense
system indicates the nearest obstacle.
The minimum height of a detectable obstacle
corresponds to the maximum height of an obstacle
that would clear the underside of the vehicle
during the parking maneuver.
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your
vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and
you could lose control and have an accident. Do
not use Cruise Control in heavy traffic or on
roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or
slippery.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 62
STARTING AND OPERATING 63
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST
A
LERTS
If an obstacle is behind the vehicle when REVERSE gear is engaged, an audible alert is activated.
The tones emitted by the loudspeaker inform the driver that the vehicle is approaching an obstacle. The pauses between the tones are directly proportional to
the distance from the obstacle. Pulses emitted in quick succession indicate the presence of a very close obstacle. A continuous tone indicates that the obstacle
is less than 12 inches (30 cm) away.
While audible signals are emitted, the audio system is muted.
The audible signal is turned off immediately if the distance increases. The tone cycle remains constant if the distance measured by the inner sensors is constant.
If this condition occurs for the external sensors, the signal is turned off after three seconds (stopping warnings during maneuvers parallel to walls).
Audible And Visual Signals Supplied By The Park Assist System
SIGNAL MEANING INDICATION
Obstacle Distance
An obstacle is present within the sensors' field of view
Audible signal (dashboard loudspeaker)
• Sound pulses emitted at a rate that increases as
the distance decreases
• Emits continuous tone at 12 inches (30 cm)
• Adjustable volume level programmable through
personal settings in the instrument cluster display
Ú page 40
Failure Sensor or system failures
Visual Signal (instrument panel)
• Icon appears on display
• Message is displayed on instrument cluster
display (if equipped)
4
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 63
64 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST
F
AILURE INDICATIONS
A malfunction of the ParkSense sensors
or system is indicated, during REVERSE
gear engagement, by the instrument
panel warning icon.
The warning icon is illuminated and a message is
displayed on the instrument cluster display (if
equipped) Ú page 44.
The sensors and wiring are tested continuously
when the ignition is in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN)
position. Failures are indicated immediately if they
occur when the system is on.
Even if the system is able to identify that a specific
sensor is in failure condition, the instrument
cluster display shall indicate that the ParkSense
system is unavailable, without reference to the
sensor in failure condition. If even a single sensor
fails, the entire system will be disabled. The system
is turned off automatically.
CLEANING THE PARKSENSE REAR PARK
A
SSIST SYSTEM
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash
soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard
cloths. In washing stations, clean sensors quickly
while keeping the vapor jet/high pressure washing
nozzles at least 4 inches (10 cm) from the sensors.
Do not scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you
could damage the sensors.
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST
S
YSTEM USAGE PRECAUTIONS
NOTE:
Ensure that the outer surface and the underside
of the rear fascia/bumper is clean and clear of
snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction to keep
the ParkSense Rear Park Assist system oper-
ating properly.
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibra-
tions could affect the performance of the
ParkSense system.
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking
care not to scratch or damage them. The sensors
must not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud,
dirt or debris. Failure to do so can result in the
system not working properly. The ParkSense
system might not detect an obstacle behind the
fascia/bumper, or it could provide a false indica-
tion that an obstacle is behind the fascia/bumper.
Objects such as bicycle carriers, etc., must not
be placed within 12 inches (30 cm) from the
rear fascia/bumper while driving the vehicle.
Failure to do so can result in the system misin-
terpreting a close object as a sensor problem,
causing a failure indication to be displayed in
the instrument cluster display.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be
sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before
backing up. You are responsible for safety and
must continue to pay attention to your
surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recom-
mended that the ball mount and hitch ball
assembly be disconnected from the vehicle
when the vehicle is not used for towing.
Failure to do so can result in injury or damage
to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch
ball will be much closer to the obstacle than
the rear fascia when the vehicle sounds the
continuous tone. Also, the sensors could
detect the ball mount and hitch ball
assembly, depending on its size and shape,
giving a false indication that an obstacle is
behind the vehicle.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 64
STARTING AND OPERATING 65
If it’s necessary to keep the ball mount and hitch
ball assembly mounted for a long period, it is
possible to filter out the ball mount and hitch ball
assembly presence in the sensor field of view. The
filtering operation must be performed only by an
authorized dealer.
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
Your vehicle is equipped with the ParkView Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an
on-screen image of the rear surroundings of your
vehicle whenever the gear selector is put into
REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the
touchscreen display along with a caution note to
“Check Entire Surroundings” across the top of the
screen. After five seconds this note will disappear.
The ParkView camera is located on the rear of the
vehicle above the rear license plate.
The Rear Back Up Camera can also be activated
when the vehicle is not in REVERSE through the
Uconnect system Ú page 79.
NOTE:
If one of the rear cargo doors is not completely
closed, the Back Up Camera cannot provide an
accurate image of the area behind the vehicle. A
dedicated message will appear on the Uconnect
display indicating the camera is not in the correct
position.
The Camera Delay setting can be set to on/off in
the rear camera settings menu. When the vehicle
is shifted out of REVERSE and the Camera Delay is
turned off, the rear camera mode is exited and the
navigation or audio screen appears on display
again.
When the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE,
and Camera Delay is activated in the menu screen,
the camera image will continue to be displayed for
up to 10 seconds, unless the speed of the vehicle
is greater than 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission
is in PARK, or the ignition is placed in the STOP
(OFF/LOCK) position.
When displayed, static grid lines will illustrate the
width of the vehicle and will show separate zones
that will help indicate the distance to the rear of
the vehicle. The following table shows the
approximate distances for each zone:
CAUTION!
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle, including
small obstacles. Parking curbs might be
temporarily detected or not detected at all.
Obstacles located above or below the sensors
will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recom-
mended that the driver looks over his/her
shoulder when using ParkSense.
Zone
Distance To The Rear
Of The Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
Green
3 ft or greater
(1 m or greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera.
Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before
backing up. You are responsible for the safety of
your surroundings and must continue to pay
attention while backing up. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
4
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 65
66 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the
lens.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE
The gas cap is located on the left side of the
vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure
to use the correct replacement cap for this vehicle
1. Open the fuel filler door.
2. Remove the fuel cap by rotating it counter-
clockwise.
Fuel Filler Cap
NOTE:
The driver's side sliding door cannot be opened
while the fuel door is open. This feature operates
only when the sliding door is in a closed position
prior to opening the fuel door.
3. Fully insert the gasoline nozzle into the filler
pipe.
4. Fill the vehicle with fuel.
NOTE:
When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off,
the fuel tank is full.
Wait five seconds before removing the fuel
nozzle to allow excess fuel to drain from the
nozzle.
5. Remove gasoline nozzle, reinstall fuel cap and
close fuel filler door.
CAUTION!
To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should
only be used as a parking aid. The ParkView
camera is unable to view every obstacle or
object in your drive path.
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView to be able
to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is
recommended that the driver look frequently
over his/her shoulder when using ParkView.
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or
near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed
or the tank is being filled.
Never add fuel when the engine is running.
This is in violation of most state and federal
fire regulations and may cause the Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light (MIL) to turn on.
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle.
You could be burned. Always place gas
containers on the ground while filling.
CAUTION!
Damage to the fuel system or emissions
control system could result from using an
improper fuel tank filler tube cap. A poorly
fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel
system and may cause the Malfunction Indi-
cator Light (MIL) to turn on, due to fuel vapors
escaping from the system.
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not
“top off” the fuel tank after filling.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 66
STARTING AND OPERATING 67
NOTE:
Tighten the fuel filler cap until you hear a
“clicking” sound. This is an indication that the
fuel filler cap is properly tightened.
If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the MIL
may come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened
every time the vehicle is refueled.
VEHICLE LOADING
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration regulations, your vehicle has a
certification label affixed to the driver's side door or
B-pillar.
If seats are removed for carrying cargo, do not
exceed the specified GVWR and GAWR.
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label
affixed to the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear of the
driver’s door.
The label contains the following information:
Name of manufacturer
Month and year of manufacture
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front and rear
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Type of vehicle
Month, Day, and Hour of manufacture (MDH)
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read
the VIN.
GROSS VEHICLE WEIGHT RATING
(GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, and
cargo. The total load must be limited so that you do
not exceed the GVWR.
GROSS AXLE WEIGHT RATING (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front
and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front
and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not
exceed either front or rear GAWR.
TIRE SIZE
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label
represents the actual tire size on your vehicle.
Replacement tires must be equal to the load
capacity of this tire size.
RIM SIZE
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire
size listed.
INFLATION PRESSURE
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your
vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
CURB WEIGHT
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total
weight of the vehicle with all fluids, including
vehicle fuel, at full capacity conditions, and with no
occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle. The
front and rear curb weight values are determined
by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale
before any occupants or cargo are added.
WARNING!
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is
important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving
condition can result if either rating is exceeded.
You could lose control of the vehicle and have a
collision.
4
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 67
68 STARTING AND OPERATING
OVERLOADING
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires,
wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide
satisfactory service as long as you do not exceed
the GVWR and the front and rear GAWR.
The best way to figure out the total weight of your
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and
ready for operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale
to ensure that it is not over the GVWR.
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the
vehicle separately. It is important that you distribute
the load evenly over the front and rear axles.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards
and shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or
suspension components do not necessarily
increase the vehicle's GVWR.
LOADING
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its
empty weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store
heavier items down low and be sure you distribute
their weight as evenly as possible. Stow all loose
items securely before driving. If weighing the
loaded vehicle shows that you have exceeded
either GAWR, but the total load is within the
specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse
effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles
and the way the brakes operate.
NOTE:
Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label” affixed to
the B-pillar or the rear of the driver's door for your
vehicle's GVWR and GAWR.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and
information on limits to the type of towing you can
reasonably do with your vehicle. Before towing a
trailer, carefully review this information to tow your
load as efficiently and safely as possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty
coverage, follow the requirements and
recommendations in this manual concerning
vehicles used for trailer towing.
COMMON TOWING DEFINITIONS
The following trailer towing related definitions will
assist you in understanding the following
information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo
and tongue weight. The total load must be limited
so that you do not exceed the GVWR Ú page 67.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight
of all cargo, consumables and equipment
(permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the
trailer in its "loaded and ready for operation"
condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put
your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The
entire weight of the trailer must be supported by
the scale.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front
and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front
and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not
exceed either front or rear GAWR Ú page 67.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the
maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous
driving condition can result if either rating is
exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle
and have a collision.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 68
STARTING AND OPERATING 69
Tongue Weight (TW)
The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch
ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of
the load on your vehicle.
Trailer Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied
by the maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
The TSC can be a mechanical telescoping link that
can be installed between the hitch receiver and the
trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable
friction associated with the telescoping motion to
dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions
while traveling.
If equipped, the electronic TSC recognizes a
swaying trailer and automatically applies individual
wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to
attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch
ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle.
These kinds of hitches are commonly used to tow
small and medium sized trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
The weight-distributing hitch works by applying
leverage through spring (load) bars. They are
typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer
tongue weight to the tow vehicle's front axle and
the trailer axle(s). When used in accordance with
the manufacturer's directions, it provides for a
more level ride, offering more consistent steering
and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway
control also dampens sway caused by traffic and
crosswinds and contributes positively to tow
vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer Sway Control
(TSC) and a weight distributing (load equalizing)
hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on
vehicle and trailer configuration/loading to comply
with Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
requirements.
WARNING!
An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing
Hitch system may reduce handling, stability,
braking performance, and could result in a
collision.
Weight Distributing Systems may not be
compatible with Surge Brake Couplers.
Consult with your hitch and trailer manufac-
turer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle
dealer for additional information.
4
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 69
70 STARTING AND OPERATING
TRAILER HITCH CLASSIFICATION
The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting
the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lb (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lb (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 6,000 lb (2,721 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lb (4,535 kg)
See chart on Ú page 71 for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 70
STARTING AND OPERATING 71
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (MAXIMUM
T
RAILER WEIGHT RATINGS)
NOTE:
For trailer towing information (maximum trailer
weight ratings) refer to the following website
addresses:
ramtrucks.com/en/towing_guide/
ramtruck.ca (Canada)
rambodybuilder.com
TRAILER AND TONGUE WEIGHT
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight
stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch.
Weight Distribution
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
The tongue weight of the trailer.
The weight of any other type of cargo or equip-
ment put in or on your vehicle.
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on the trailer
adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options
must be considered as part of the total load on
your vehicle. Refer to the Tire And Loading Infor-
mation placard for the maximum combined weight
of occupants and cargo for your vehicle
Ú page 221.
TOWING REQUIREMENTS
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle
drivetrain components, the following guidelines
are recommended.
Perform the maintenance listed in Scheduled
Servicing for the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 189. When towing a trailer, never exceed
the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
CAUTION!
Always load a trailer with 60% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% of the
GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads
balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear
can cause the trailer to sway severely side to
side which will cause loss of control of the
vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trailers heavier
in front is the cause of many trailer collisions.
CAUTION!
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first
500 miles (805 km) the new vehicle is driven.
The engine, axle or other parts could be
damaged.
Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that
a trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full
throttle. This helps the engine and other parts
of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
4
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 71
72 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
Towing Requirements — Tires
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a
compact spare tire.
Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h) when
towing while using a full size spare tire.
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to
the safe and satisfactory operation of your
vehicle.
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
pressures before trailer usage.
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire
damage before towing a trailer.
When replacing tires with a higher load carrying
capacity they will not increase the vehicle's
GVWR and GAWR limits.
For further information Ú page 217.
WARNING!
Make certain that the load is secured in the
trailer and will not shift during travel. When
trailering cargo that is not fully secured,
dynamic load shifts can occur that may be
difficult for the driver to control. You could lose
control of your vehicle and have a collision.
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading
can cause a loss of control, poor performance
or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmis-
sion, steering, suspension, chassis structure
or tires.
Safety chains must always be used between
your vehicle and trailer. Always connect the
chains to the hook retainers of the vehicle
hitch. Cross the chains under the trailer
tongue and allow enough slack for turning
corners.
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on
a grade. When parking, apply the parking
brake on the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle
transmission in PARK. For four-wheel drive
vehicles, make sure the transfer case is not in
NEUTRAL. Always, block or "chock" the trailer
wheels.
GCWR must not be exceeded.
Total weight must be distributed between the
tow vehicle and the trailer such that the
following four ratings are not exceeded:
GVWR
GTW
GAWR
Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch
utilized.
WARNING!
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 72
STARTING AND OPERATING 73
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system
or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of
the trailer. This could cause inadequate braking
and possible personal injury.
An electronically actuated trailer brake
controller is required when towing a trailer with
electronically actuated brakes. When towing a
trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated
brake system, an electronic brake controller is
not required.
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers
over 1,000 lb (453 kg) and required for trailers
in excess of 2,000 lb (907 kg).
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And
Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer
size, stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are
required for motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and
seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved
trailer harness and connector.
NOTE:
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring
harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the
vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer
connector. Refer to the following illustrations.
NOTE:
Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the
vehicle before launching a boat (or any other
device plugged into vehicle’s electrical connect)
into water.
Be sure to reconnect once clear from water
area.
Four-Pin Connector
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your
brake system and cause it to fail. You might
not have brakes when you need them and
could have an accident.
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing, you should allow for
additional space between your vehicle and the
vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could
result in an accident.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lb (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do
this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear,
higher brake pedal effort, and longer stopping
distances.
1 — Ground
2 — Park
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Right Stop/Turn
4
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 73
74 STARTING AND OPERATING
Seven-Pin Connector
TOWING TIPS
Before towing, practice turning, stopping, and
backing up the trailer in an area located away from
heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. The
transmission controls include a drive strategy to
avoid frequent shifting when towing. However, if
frequent shifting does occur while in DRIVE, use
the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control to
select a lower gear range.
NOTE:
Using a lower gear range while operating the
vehicle under heavy loading conditions will
improve performance and extend transmission life
by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up.
This action will also provide better engine braking.
Electronic Range Select (ERS)
When using the ERS shift control, select the
highest gear that allows for adequate perfor-
mance and avoids frequent downshifts. For
example, choose “5” if the desired speed can be
maintained. Choose “4” or “3” if needed to
maintain the desired speed.
To prevent excess heat generation, avoid
continuous driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle
speed as necessary to avoid extended driving at
high RPM. Return to a higher gear range or
vehicle speed when grade and road conditions
allow.
Cruise Control — If Equipped
Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
When using the Cruise Control, if you experience
speed drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h),
disengage until you can get back to cruising
speed.
Use Cruise Control in flat terrain and with light
loads to maximize fuel efficiency.
1 — Backup Lamps
2 — Running Lamps
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Ground
5 — Battery
6 — Right Stop/Turn
7 — Electric Brakes
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 74
STARTING AND OPERATING 75
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME)
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE
NOTE:
When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground Automatic Transmission
Flat Tow NONE
NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow
Front OK
Rear
NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK
4
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 75
76 STARTING AND OPERATING
RECREATIONAL TOWING — AUTOMATIC
T
RANSMISSION
Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the front
wheels are
OFF the ground. This may be
accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle trailer. If
using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle,
following the dolly manufacturer's
instructions.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Place the
transmission in PARK.
4. Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly,
following the dolly manufacturer's instructions.
5. Release the parking brake.
DRIVING TIPS
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other
slippery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to
pull erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon
occurs when there is a difference in the surface
traction under the front (driving) wheels.
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible
for a wedge of water to build up between the tire
and road surface. This is hydroplaning and may
cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control
and stopping ability. To reduce this possibility, the
following precautions should be observed:
Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads
are slushy.
Slow down if the road has standing water or
puddles.
Replace the tires when tread wear indicators
first become visible.
Keep tires properly inflated.
Maintain sufficient distance between your
vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a
collision in a sudden stop.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to
ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
CAUTION!
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the
drivetrain will result. If this vehicle requires
towing, make sure the drive wheels are OFF
the ground.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission
damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is
dangerous. Unequal traction can cause sudden
pulling of the front wheels. You could lose control of
the vehicle and possibly have a collision. Accelerate
slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be
poor traction (ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 76
STARTING AND OPERATING 77
(Continued)
(Continued)
Flowing/Rising Water
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following
Cautions and Warnings before doing so.
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where
water is flowing and/or rising (as in storm
run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road
or path's surface and cause your vehicle to sink
into deeper water. Furthermore, flowing and/or
rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly.
Failure to follow this warning may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
WARNING!
Driving through standing water limits your
vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed
5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through
standing water.
Driving through standing water limits your
vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases
stopping distances. Therefore, after driving
through standing water, drive slowly and
lightly press on the brake pedal several times
to dry the brakes.
Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
CAUTION!
Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom
of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
Determine the condition of the road or the
path that is under water and if there are any
obstacles in the way before driving through
the standing water.
WARNING!
Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize
wave effects.
Driving through standing water may cause
damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain compo-
nents. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids
(i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for
signs of contamination (i.e., fluid that is milky
or foamy in appearance) after driving through
standing water. Do not continue to operate
the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated,
as this may result in further damage. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause
serious internal damage to the engine. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
4
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 77
78
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect
system, refer to Ú page 88.
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration
purposes only and may not reflect exact software
for your vehicle.
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may
be equipped with both wired and wireless
networks. These networks allow your vehicle to
send and receive information. This information
allows systems and features in your vehicle to
function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security
features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and
unlawful access to vehicle systems and wireless
communications. Vehicle software technology
continues to evolve over time and FCA US LLC,
working with its suppliers, evaluates and takes
appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a
computer or other devices, your vehicle may
require software updates to improve the usability
and performance of your systems or to reduce the
potential risk of unauthorized and unlawful access
to your vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to
your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the
most recent version of vehicle software (such as
Uconnect software) is installed.
NOTE:
FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you
directly regarding software updates.
To help further improve vehicle security and
minimize the potential risk of a security breach,
vehicle owners should:
Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/
support/software-update.html
(US Resi-
dents) or www.driveuconnect.ca (Cana-
dian Residents) to learn about available
Uconnect software updates.
Only connect and use trusted media
devices (e.g. personal mobile phones,
USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications
cannot be assured. Third parties may unlawfully
intercept information and private communications
without your consent Ú page 51.
WARNING!
It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems
are breached. It may be possible that vehicle
systems, including safety related systems,
could be impaired or a loss of vehicle control
could occur that may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
ONLY insert trusted devices/components into
your vehicle. Media of unknown origin could
possibly contain malicious software, and if
installed in your vehicle, it may increase the
possibility for vehicle systems to be breached.
As always, if you experience unusual vehicle
behavior, take your vehicle to your nearest
authorized dealer immediately.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 78
MULTIMEDIA 79
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of
buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the
faceplate located on the center of the instrument
panel. These buttons allow you to access and
change the customer programmable features.
Many features can vary by vehicle.
Buttons on the faceplate are located below and/or
beside the Uconnect system in the center of the
instrument panel. In addition, there is a Scroll/
Enter control knob located on the right side. Turn
the control knob to scroll through menus and
change settings. Push the center of the control
knob one or more times to select or change a
setting.
Your Uconnect system may also have Screen Off
and Mute buttons on the faceplate.
Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to turn
off the Uconnect screen. Push the button again or
tap the screen to turn the screen on.
Push the Back Arrow button to exit out of a menu
or certain option on the Uconnect system.
NOTE:
The NAV button in the middle of your Uconnect
System may also contain the word CAMERA.
UCONNECT 3/3 NAV SETTINGS
Uconnect 3/3 NAV With 5-inch Display Buttons On The
Touchscreen And Buttons On The Faceplate
Push the Settings button on the faceplate to
display the menu setting screen. In this mode, the
Uconnect system allows you to access
programmable features that may be equipped.
NOTE:
Only one category may be selected at a time.
The Back Arrow will change into a Done button if
any changes are made.
When making a selection, press one button on the
touchscreen to enter the desired menu. Once in
the desired menu, press and release the preferred
setting option until a check mark appears next to
the setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Once the setting is complete, either
press the Back Arrow button to return to the
previous menu, or press the X button on the
touchscreen to close out of the settings screen.
Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on the right
side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or
down through the available settings.
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
5
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 79
80 MULTIMEDIA
Language
Display
When the Language button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different language options. Once an option is selected, the system will
display in the chosen language. The available setting is:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Language
This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system. The available
languages are English, Français, and Español.
When the Display button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the options related to the theme (if equipped), brightness, and color of the
touchscreen. The available settings are:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Display Mode
This setting will allow you to set the brightness manually or have the system
set it automatically. The “Auto” setting has the system automatically adjust
the display brightness. The “Manual” setting will allow the user to adjust the
brightness of the display.
Brightness
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on. To
access this setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “With
Headlights On” setting will increase or decrease the brightness with the
headlight on; the “With Headlights Off” will increase or decrease the
brightness with the headlights off.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 80
MULTIMEDIA 81
Units
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Display Trip B
This setting will turn on or off the Trip B display on the Instrument Cluster
Display.
Setting Name Description
When the Units button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different measurement options. The selected unit of measurement will display
in the instrument cluster display and Navigation system (if equipped). The available settings are:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
US This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to US.
Metric This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to Metric.
Custom
This setting changes the “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km),
“Fuel Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure”
(psi, kPa, or bar), and “Temperature” (°C or °F) units of measurement
independently.
5
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 81
82 MULTIMEDIA
Voice
Clock & Date
When the Voice button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s Voice Recognition feature.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Voice Response Length
This setting will change the response length for the Voice Recognition system.
When set to “Brief”, the system provides a shortened audio description. When
set to “Long”, the system provides the full audio description from the system.
Show Command List
This setting will allow you to turn the Command List on or off. The “Always”
setting will always show the Command List. The “w/Help” setting will show the
Command List and provide a brief description of what the command does.
The “Never” setting will turn the Command List off.
When the Clock & Date button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different options related to the vehicle’s internal clock.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Sync Time
This setting will sync the time to the system’s GPS receiver. The system will
control the time via GPS location.
Set Time & Format/Time Format
This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). “Sync Time” must
be off for this setting to be available. The “12 h” setting will set the time to a
12-hour format. The “24 h” setting will set the time to a 24-hour format.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 82
MULTIMEDIA 83
Safety/Assistance
Lights
Set Date
This setting will allow you to set the date. The selectable options are “Date”,
“Month”, and “Year”. You can also change the clock settings.
Show Time Status This setting will place the time in the radio’s status bar.
Setting Name Description
When the Safety/Assistance button is pressed, the system displays the option related to the vehicle’s safety settings.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
This setting will add a delay to the ParkView Backup Camera when shifting out
of REVERSE.
After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
NOTE:
When the Daytime Running Lights feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned on or off. This feature is only allowed by law in the country
of the vehicle purchased.
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Daytime Running Lights This setting will allow you to turn the Daytime Running Lights on or off.
5
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 83
84 MULTIMEDIA
Doors & Locks
Key Off/Engine Off Options
When the Doors & Locks button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to locking and unlocking the vehicle’s doors.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Sound Horn With Lock
This setting will sound the horn when the key fob’s Lock button is pushed. The
“Off” setting will not sound the horn. The “1st Press” setting will sound the
horn when the Lock button is pushed once. The “2nd Press” setting will sound
the horn when the Lock button is pushed twice.
Auto Door Locks
This setting will allow you to change if the doors lock automatically when the
vehicle reaches 12 mph (20 km/h).
When the Key Off/Engine Off Options button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the option related to vehicle shut off. These settings will only
activate when the ignition is set to OFF.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Radio Off Delay
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time the radio remains on after
the vehicle has been turned off. The “0 min” setting will shut the radio off the
moment the vehicle is turned off. The “20 min” setting will leave the radio on
for 20 minutes after the vehicle has been turned off or until one of the doors
has been opened.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 84
MULTIMEDIA 85
Audio
When the Audio button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s sound system. These settings can change the audio
location within the vehicle, adjust the bass or treble levels, and auto-play music from an audio device or smartphone.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Equalizer This setting will adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” ranges of the audio.
Balance
This setting will adjust audio levels from specific speakers in the front/back and
left/right of the vehicle. The Speaker icon can be moved to set audio location.
Speed Adjusted Volume
This setting will adjust audio volume as speeds increase. At a higher setting,
the volume will increase more as the vehicle speeds up. The available settings
are “Off”, “1”, “2”, and “3”.
Surround Sound This setting will turn the Surround Sound system on or off.
Auto Play This setting will automatically begin playing audio from a connected device.
Loudness This setting will improve audio quality at lower volumes.
Auto-On Radio
This setting will set how the radio behaves when the ignition is switched to
ON/RUN. The available settings are “On”, “Off”, and “Recall Last”.
5
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 85
86 MULTIMEDIA
Phone/Bluetooth®
SiriusXM® Setup
When the Phone/Bluetooth® button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the option related to Bluetooth® connectivity from an external audio
device or smartphone. The list of paired audio devices or smartphones can be accessed from this menu.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Paired Phones/Devices This setting will show which phones are paired to the Uconnect system.
When the SiriusXM® Setup button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to SiriusXM® Satellite Radio. These settings can be
used to skip specific radio channels and restart favorite songs from the beginning.
NOTE:
A subscription to SiriusXM® Satellite Radio is required for these settings to be functional.
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Tune Start
This setting will play the current song from the beginning when you tune to a
music channel using one of the 12 presets.
Channel Skip
This setting allows you to set channels that you wish to skip. A channel list will
display of the skipped channels.
Subscription Information
This menu provides SiriusXM® subscription information. SiriusXM® Travel
Link is a separate subscription.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 86
MULTIMEDIA 87
Restore Settings
Clear Personal Data
When the Restore Settings button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the option related to resetting the Uconnect system back to its factory
settings. This setting can clear personal data and reset selected settings from other menus.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Restore Settings to Default
This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory
default.
When the Clear Personal Data button is pressed on the touchscreen, a pop-up will display asking if you would like to clear all personal data from the system.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Clear Personal Data
This setting will display a pop-up that provides the option to clear all personal
data from the system, including Bluetooth® devices and presets.
5
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 87
88 MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT INTRODUCTION
IDENTIFYING YOUR RADIO
Uconnect 3/3 NAV With 5-inch Display
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration
purposes only and may not reflect exact software
for your vehicle.
1 — SCREEN OFF Button
2 — Mute Button
3 — BACK Button
4 — Settings Button
5 — ENTER/BROWSE & TUNE/SCROLL Knob
6 — VOLUME & On/Off Button
7 — RADIO Button
8 — MEDIA Button
9 — NAV/CAMERA Button
10 — PHONE Button
11 — MORE Button
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 88
MULTIMEDIA 89
Feature Description
Settings Push the Settings button to access the Uconnect Settings.
BACK Push the BACK button to return to a previous page.
ENTER/BROWSE & TUNE/SCROLL Knob
Push the ENTER/BROWSE button to accept a highlighted selection on the
screen. Rotate the TUNE/SCROLL rotary knob to scroll through a list or tune a
radio station.
MORE
Push the MORE button to access additional options such as “Trip” and
“Clock”.
PHONE
Push the PHONE button to enter Phone Mode and access the hands-free
phone system.
NAV/CAMERA
Push the CAMERA button to see the rear view image on the radio display. If
equipped, push the NAV button to access Navigation Mode, the system’s
built-in navigation feature.
MEDIA
Push the MEDIA button to enter Media Mode and access controls for external
audio sources.
RADIO
Push the RADIO button to enter Radio Mode and access the system’s radio
functions.
VOLUME & On/Off
Rotate the rotary knob to adjust the volume. Push the VOLUME & On/Off
button to turn the system on or off.
Mute
Push the Mute button to turn the audio of the radio system off. Push it again
to turn the audio on.
SCREEN OFF Push the SCREEN OFF button to turn the screen on or off.
5
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 89
90 MULTIMEDIA
SAFETY AND GENERAL INFORMATION
Safety Guidelines
Please read the manual carefully before using the
system. It contains instructions on how to use the
system in a safe and effective manner.
Please read and follow these safety precautions.
Failure to do so may result in injury or property
damage.
Glance at the screen only when it is safe to do
so. If prolonged viewing of the screen is
required, park in a safe location and set the
parking brake.
Stop use immediately if a problem occurs.
Failure to do so may cause injury or damage to
the product. Return it to an authorized dealer to
repair.
Ensure the volume level of the system is set to a
level that still allows you to hear outside traffic
and emergency vehicles.
Safe Usage Of The Uconnect System
Your system is a sophisticated electronic
device. Do not let young children use your
system.
Permanent hearing loss may occur if you play
your music or sound system at loud volumes.
Exercise caution when setting the volume on
your system.
Keep drinks, rain and other sources of moisture
away from your system. Besides damage to your
system, moisture can cause electric shocks as
with any electronic device.
NOTE:
Many features of this system are speed
dependent. For your own safety, it is not possible to
use some of the touchscreen features while the
vehicle is in motion.
Care And Maintenance
Touchscreen
Do not press the touchscreen with any hard or
sharp objects (pen, USB stick, jewelry, etc.)
which could scratch the touchscreen surface!
Do not spray any liquid or caustic chemicals
directly on the screen! Use a clean and dry
microfiber lens cleaning cloth in order to clean
the touchscreen.
If necessary, use a lint-free cloth dampened
with a cleaning solution, such as isopropyl
alcohol or an isopropyl alcohol and water solu-
tion ratio of 50:50. Be sure to follow the solvent
manufacturer's precautions and directions
Ú page 245.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to do
so. Failure to do so may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen,
doing so can result in breaking the touchscreen.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 90
MULTIMEDIA 91
UCONNECT MODES
RADIO MODE
Operating Radio Mode
Uconnect 3/3 NAV With 5-inch Display Radio Mode
The radio is equipped with the following modes:
FM
AM
SiriusXM® Radio
Push the Radio button on the faceplate to enter
the Radio Mode. The different tuner modes, FM/
AM/SXM, can then be selected by pressing the
corresponding buttons on the touchscreen in the
Radio mode.
SWITCHING THE SYSTEM ON/OFF
The screen will switch on/off when the Volume &
On/Off button is pushed.
VOLUME/POWER
Rotate the Volume knob to adjust the volume.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will
be set at the same volume level as last played.
Push the On/Off button to turn the system on or
off.
ENTER/BROWSE AND TUNE/SCROLL
CONTROL
Turn the rotary Tune/Scroll knob clockwise to
increase or counterclockwise to decrease the radio
station frequency.
SEEK FUNCTIONS
Seek Up And Seek Down
Press and release the Seek Up or Seek Down
button on the touchscreen to tune the radio to the
next available station or channel. If the radio
reaches the starting station after passing through
the entire band two times, the radio will stop at the
station where it began.
Fast Seek Up And Fast Seek Down
Press, hold, and then release the Seek Up or
Seek Down button on the touchscreen to
advance the radio through the available stations or
channels at a faster rate. The radio stops at the
next available station or channel when the button
on the touchscreen is released.
NOTE:
Pressing and holding either the Seek Up or
Seek Down button will scan the different
frequency bands at a slower rate.
1 — Preset Buttons
2 — All Presets Button
3 — Seek Down Button
4 — Radio Band Button (FM/AM/SXM)
5 — Direct Tune Button
6 — Info Button
7 — Audio Settings Button
8 — Seek Up Button
5
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 91
92 MULTIMEDIA
DIRECT TUNE
Press the Tune button located at the bottom of the
radio screen to directly tune to a desired radio
station or channel.
Press the available number button on the
touchscreen to begin selecting a desired station.
Once a number has been entered, any numbers
that are no longer possible (stations that cannot be
reached) will become deactivated/grayed out.
INFO
Press the Info button to display the current track
information. Press the X button to cancel this
feature.
SETTING THE PRESETS
The Presets are available for all Radio Modes, and
are activated by pressing any of the four Preset
buttons, located at the top of the screen.
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit into memory, press and hold the desired
numbered button for more that two seconds or
until you hear a confirmation beep.
The Radio stores up to 12 presets in each of the
Radio modes. Four presets are visible at the top of
the radio screen.
Pressing the All button on the radio home screen
will display all of the preset stations for that mode.
SIRIUSXM® SATELLITE RADIO MODE
Uconnect 3/3 NAV With 5-inch Display Changing To
SiriusXM®
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio uses direct
satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to
provide clear, coast-to-coast radio content.
SiriusXM® is a subscription-based service.
Visit
siriusxm.com/getallaccess or review your
SiriusXM® Radio pamphlet in your Owner’s
Manual kit.
SiriusXM® services require subscriptions sold
separately after the trial included with the new
vehicle purchase. If you decide to continue your
service at the end of your trial subscription, the
plan you choose will automatically renew and bill at
then-current rates until you call SiriusXM® at
866-635-2349 to cancel. See SiriusXM®
Customer Agreement for complete terms at
www.siriusxm.com (US) or www.siriusxm.ca
(Canada). All fees and programming subject to
change. Our satellite service is available to those
at least 18 and older in the 48 contiguous US and
D.C. Our SiriusXM® satellite service is also
available in Canada and Puerto Rico (with
coverage limitations). Our Internet radio service is
available throughout our satellite service area and
in AK. © 2021 SiriusXM® Radio Inc. SiriusXM®
and all related marks and logos are trademarks of
SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
This functionality is only available for radios
equipped with a Satellite receiver. In order to
receive satellite radio, the vehicle needs to be
outside with a clear view to the sky.
If the screen shows “Acquiring Signal”, you might
have to change the vehicle’s position in order to
receive a signal. In most cases, the satellite radio
does not receive a signal in underground parking
garages or tunnels.
No Subscription
Radios equipped with a satellite receiver require a
subscription to the SiriusXM® Service. When the
radio does not have the necessary subscription,
the radio is able to receive the Preview channel
only.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 92
MULTIMEDIA 93
Acquiring SiriusXM® Subscription
To activate the SiriusXM® Satellite Radio
subscription, US visit
www.UconnectPhone.com
or call: 1-800-643-2112
Canada visit
www.UconnectPhone.com or call:
1-800-465-2001 (English)or 1-800-387-9983
(French)
NOTE:
You will need to provide the SiriusXM® ID (RID)
located at the bottom of the Channel 0 screen.
The Satellite Mode is activated by a press of the
SXM button on the touchscreen.
When in Satellite mode:
The SXM button on the touchscreen is high-
lighted.
The SiriusXM® Presets are displayed at the top
of the screen.
The SiriusXM® Channel Number is displayed in
the center.
The Program Information is displayed at the
bottom of the Channel Number.
The SiriusXM® function buttons are displayed
below the Program Information.
Tuning is done by operating the Tune Knob or by
Direct Tune, similar to other Radio Bands.
In addition to the tuning operation functions
common to all radio modes, the Replay, Traffic/
Weather button, and Favorite button functions are
available in SiriusXM® Mode.
Uconnect 3/3 NAV With 5-inch Display SiriusXM®
Satellite Radio
Replay
The replay function provides a means to store and
replay up to 22 minutes of music audio and
48 minutes of talk radio. Once the channel is
switched, content in replay memory is lost.
Press the Replay button on the touchscreen. The
Play/Pause, Rewind/Forward and Live buttons will
display at the top of the screen, along with the
replay time.
You can exit by pressing the Replay button on the
touchscreen any time during the Replay mode.
1 — Browse Button
2 — Radio Bands Button
3 — Direct Tune Button
4 — Info Button
5 — Next Button
5
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 93
94 MULTIMEDIA
Play/Pause
Press the Pause/Play button on the touchscreen to
pause the playing of live or rewound content at any
time. Play can be resumed by pressing the Pause/
Play button on the touchscreen.
Rewind
Press the Rewind button on the touchscreen to
rewind the content in steps of five seconds.
Pressing the Rewind button on the touchscreen for
more than two seconds rewinds the content. The
radio begins playing the content at the point at
which the press is released.
Forward
Each press of the Forward button on the
touchscreen forwards the content in steps of five
seconds. Forwarding of the content can only be
done when the content is previously rewound, and
therefore, cannot be done for live content. A
continuous press of the Forward button on the
touchscreen also forwards the content. The radio
begins playing the content at the point at which the
press is released.
Live
Press the Live button on the touchscreen to
resume the playing of live content.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 94
MULTIMEDIA 95
Favorites
Press the Favorites button on the touchscreen to
activate the Favorites Menu, which will time out
within 20 seconds in absence of user interaction.
You can exit the Favorites Menu by a press of the X
button.
The Favorites feature enables you to set a favorite
artist or song that is currently playing. The radio
then uses this information to alert you when either
the favorite artist or song is being played at any
time by any of the SiriusXM® Channels.
The maximum number of favorites that can be
stored in the Radio is 50.
Favorite Artist: While the song is playing, to set a
favorite artist, press the Favorites button on the
touchscreen and then the Favorite Artist button on
the touchscreen.
Favorite Song: While the song is playing, to set a
favorite song, press the Favorites button on the
touchscreen and then the Favorite Song button on
the touchscreen.
Browse In SXM
Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to
edit Presets, Favorites, Game Zone, and Jump
settings, along with providing the SiriusXM®
Channel List.
This screen contains many submenus. You can exit
a submenu to return to a parent menu by pressing
the Back arrow.
All
Press the All button on the Browse Screen. When
pressing the All button, the following categories
become available:
Channel List: Press the Channel List to display
all the SiriusXM® Channel Numbers. You can
scroll the Channel List by pressing the Up and
Down arrows located on the right side of the
screen. Scrolling can also be done by operating
the TUNE/SCROLL knob.
Genre: Press the Genre button on the touch-
screen to display a list of Genres. You can select
any desired Genre by pressing the Genre List;
the radio tunes to a channel with the content in
the selected Genre.
Favorites
Press the Favorites button on the Browse screen.
The Favorites menu provides a means to edit the
Favorites List and to configure the Alert Settings,
along with providing a list of Channels currently
airing any of the items in the Favorites List.
You can scroll the Favorites List by pressing the Up
and Down arrows located at the right side of the
screen. Scrolling can also be done by operating the
TUNE/SCROLL knob as well.
Remove Favorites
Press the Remove Favorites tab at the top of the
screen. Press the Delete All button on the
touchscreen to delete all of the Favorites or press
the Trash Can icon next to the Favorite to be
deleted.
Alert Settings
Press the Alert Settings tab at the top of the
Favorites screen. The Alert Settings menu allows
you to choose from a visual alert or audible and
visual alert when one of your favorites is airing on
any of the SiriusXM® channels.
5
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 95
96 MULTIMEDIA
Game Zone
Press the Game Zone button, located at the left of
the Browse screen. This feature provides you with
the ability to select teams, edit the selection, and
set alerts.
On-Air
Press the On-Air tab at the top of the screen. The
On-Air List provides a list of Channels currently
airing any of the items in the Selections List, and
pressing any of the items in the list tunes the radio
to that channel.
Add/Delete — If Equipped
Press the Add/Delete button on the touchscreen to
activate the League Scroll List. Press the chosen
league and a scroll list of all teams within the
league will appear, then you can select a team by
pressing the corresponding box. A check mark
appears for all teams that are chosen.
Remove Selection/Trash Can Icon
Press the Remove Selection tab at the top of the
screen. Press the Delete All button on the
touchscreen to delete all of the selections or press
the Trash Can icon next to the selection to be
deleted.
Alert Settings
Press the Alert Setting tab at the top of the screen.
The Alert Settings menu allows you to choose from
“Alert me to on-air games upon start” or “Alert
upon score update” or both when one or more of
your selections is airing on any of the SiriusXM®
channels.
Tune Start
Tune Start begins playing the current song from
the beginning when you tune to a music channel
using one of the 12 presets. This feature occurs
the first time the preset is selected during that
current song.
AUDIO SETTINGS
Press the Audio button within the Settings Main
Menu to activate the Audio Settings screen.
Uconnect 3/3 NAV With 5-inch Display
1 — Balance/Fade
2 — Equalizer
3 — Speed Adjusted Volume
4 — Surround Sound
5 — Loudness
6 — Radio Off With Door
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 96
MULTIMEDIA 97
Audio Setting Description
Balance/Fade
Press the Balance/Fade button on the touchscreen to balance audio between
the front speakers or fade the audio between the rear and front speakers.
Press the Front, Rear, Left or Right buttons or press and drag the red Speaker
icon to adjust the Balance/Fade.
Equalizer
Press the + or – buttons or press and drag the level bar to increase or
decrease each of the equalizer bands. The level value, which spans between
plus or minus nine, is displayed at the top of each of the bands.
Speed Adjusted Volume
The Speed Adjusted Volume is adjusted by selecting from “Off”, “1”, “2”, or
“3”. This alters the automatic adjustment of the audio volume with variation
to vehicle speed. Volume increases automatically as speed increases to
compensate for normal road noise.
Surround Sound — If Equipped
When Surround Sound is on, you can hear audio coming from every direction
as in a movie theatre or home theatre system.
Loudness — If Equipped When Loudness is on, the sound quality at lower volumes improves.
Auto Play
The Auto Play feature begins playing music as soon as a USB Media device is
connected to one of the vehicle’s Media USB ports when it is turned on. Press
Off to turn the setting off.
Radio Off With Door
The Radio Off With Door feature, when activated, keeps the radio on until the
driver or passenger door is opened or when the Radio Off Delay selected time
has expired.
5
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 97
98 MULTIMEDIA
RADIO VOICE COMMANDS
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM, or
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio stations you would like
to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM®
Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button and wait for the beep to say
a command. See some examples below:
“
Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM”
“Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”
Did You Know: At any time, if you are not sure of
what to say or want to learn a Voice Command,
push the VR button and say “
Help”. The system
provides you with a list of commands.
MEDIA MODE
Operating Media Mode
Media Operation
Media Mode is entered by pushing the MEDIA
button located on the faceplate.
AUDIO SOURCE SELECTION
Once in Media Mode, press the Source button and
the desired mode button. USB and Bluetooth® are
the Media sources available. You can select the
Browse button to be given these options:
Now Playing
Artists
Albums
Genres
Songs
Playlists
Folders
You can select the Source button, Play/Pause
button, or the Info button for artist information on
the current song playing.
SEEK UP/SEEK DOWN
Seek Up /Seek Down
Press and release the Right Arrow button on the
touchscreen for the next selection. Press and
release the Left Arrow button on the
touchscreen to return to the beginning of the
current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the track is within the first few
seconds of the current selection.
1 — Seek Down Button
2 — Browse Button
3 — Source Button
4 — Play/Pause Button
5 — Info Button
6 — Next Button
7 — Seek Up Button
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 98
MULTIMEDIA 99
Fast Seek Up /Fast Seek Down
Press and hold the Right Arrow or Left Arrow
button on the touchscreen and the desired mode
will begin to fast forward or reverse through the
current track until the button on the touchscreen is
released.
TRACK SELECTION (BROWSE)
Rotate the Browse button to scroll through and
select a desired track on the device or USB. Press
the Exit button on the touchscreen if you wish to
cancel the browse function.
REPEAT
Press the Repeat button on the touchscreen to
repeat the song selection. To cancel repeat, press
the Repeat button on the touchscreen a second
time.
SHUFFLE
Press the Shuffle button on the touchscreen to
play the selections on the USB or Bluetooth®
device in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace. Press the Shuffle button on the
touchscreen a second time to turn this feature off.
INFO
Press the Info button to display the current track
information. Press the X button to cancel this
feature.
USB Mode
USB Mode is entered by either inserting a USB
Jump Drive cable into the USB port or by pushing
the MEDIA button located on the faceplate. Once in
Media Mode, press the Source button on the
touchscreen and select “USB”.
NOTE:
The system supports only FAT32 or ExFAT
formatted USB devices. The system does not
support devices with a capacity higher than 64GB.
The system does not support USB hubs connected
to the USB port of the vehicle. Connect your multi-
media device directly to the USB port using the
specific connection cable for the device if
necessary.
Inserting USB Device
Gently insert the USB device into the USB port. If
you insert a USB device with the ignition ON, the
unit will switch to USB Mode and begin to play. The
display will show the track number and index time
in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start
of track 1.
Browse
Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to
select Artist, Album, Genre, Song, Playlist or Folder
from the USB device. Once the desired selection is
made, you can chose from the available media by
pressing the button on the touchscreen. Press the
Exit button on the touchscreen if you wish to cancel
the browse function.
Bluetooth® Mode
Before proceeding, the Bluetooth® device must be
paired with the Uconnect Phone to communicate
with the Uconnect system Ú page 102.
Once the Bluetooth® device is paired to the
Uconnect system, push the MEDIA button located
on the faceplate. Once in Media Mode, press the
Source button on the touchscreen and select
Bluetooth®.
NOTE:
For mobile phone compatibility and pairing instruc-
tions, please visit
UconnectPhone.com.
5
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 99
100 MULTIMEDIA
Voice Commands Media
Uconnect offers connections via USB and
Bluetooth®. Voice operation is only available for
connected USB devices.
Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of
the following commands and follow the prompts to
switch your media source or choose an artist.
“
Change source to Bluetooth®”
“Change source to USB”
“Play artist Beethoven”; “Play album Greatest
Hits”; “
Play song Moonlight Sonata”; “Play genre
Classical”
Did You Know: Press the Browse button on the
touchscreen to see all of the music on your USB
device. Your Voice Command must match exactly
how the artist, album, song, and genre information
is displayed.
PHONE MODE
Overview
Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free,
in-vehicle communications system. Uconnect
Phone allows you to dial a phone number with your
mobile phone.
Uconnect Phone supports the following features:
Voice Activated Features
Hands-Free dialing via Voice (“Call John Smith
Mobile” or “Dial 248-555-1212”).
Hands-Free text-to-speech listening of your
incoming SMS messages.
Hands-Free Text Message Replying: Forward
one of 18 predefined SMS messages to
incoming calls/text messages.
Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”).
Calling back the last incoming call number (“Call
Back”).
Viewing call logs on screen (“Show Incoming
Calls,” “Show Outgoing Calls,” “Show Missed
Calls,” or “Show Recent Calls”).
Searching Contacts phone number (“Search for
John Smith Mobile”).
Screen Activated Features
Dialing via Keypad using touchscreen.
Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks
displayed on the touchscreen.
Setting Favorite Contact phone numbers so they
are easily accessible on the Main Phone screen.
Viewing and Calling contacts from recent call
logs.
Reviewing your recent Incoming SMS
Messages.
Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for easy
access to connect to them quickly.
NOTE:
Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging via
Bluetooth® for messaging features to work
properly.
Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through
your vehicle’s audio system; the system will
automatically mute your radio when using the
Uconnect Phone.
For Uconnect customer support:
US — visit UconnectPhone.com or call
877-855-8400
Canada — visit UconnectPhone.com or call
800-465-2001 (English)
800-387-9983 (French)
Visit UconnectPhone.com
Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls
between the system and your mobile phone as you
enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute
the system's microphone for private conversation.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 100
MULTIMEDIA 101
The Uconnect Phone is driven through your
Bluetooth® “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone.
Uconnect features Bluetooth® technology — the
global standard that enables different electronic
devices to connect to each other without wires or a
docking station. Ensure you phone is turned on
with Bluetooth® active and has been paired to the
vehicle's Uconnect Phone. The Uconnect Phone
allows up to 10 mobile phones or audio devices to
be linked to the system. Only one linked (or paired)
mobile phone and one audio device can be used
with the system at a time.
Uconnect Phone Button
The Uconnect Phone button on your steering wheel
is used to get into the phone mode and make calls,
show recent, incoming or outgoing calls, view
phonebook, etc. When you push the button you will
hear a BEEP. The BEEP is your signal to give a
command.
Uconnect Voice Command Button
The Uconnect Voice Command button on your
steering wheel is only used for “barge in” and when
you are already in a call or want to make another
call.
The button on your steering wheel is also used to
access the Voice Commands for the Uconnect
Voice Command features.
Phone Operation
OPERATION
Voice commands can be used to operate the
Uconnect Phone and to navigate through the
Uconnect Phone menu structure. Voice commands
are required after most Uconnect Phone prompts.
There are two general methods for how Voice
Command works:
1. Say compound commands like “Call John
Smith mobile”.
2. Say the individual commands and allow the
system to guide you to complete the task.
You will be prompted for a specific command and
then guided through the available options.
Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait
for the beep, which follows the “Listen” prompt
or another prompt.
For certain operations, compound commands
can be used. For example, instead of saying
“Call” and then “John Smith” and then “mobile”,
the following compound command can be said:
“Call John Smith mobile.”
For each feature explanation in this section,
only the compound command form of the voice
command is given. You can also break the
commands into parts and say each part of the
command when you are asked for it. For
example, you can use the compound command
form voice command “Search for John Smith,”
or you can break the compound command form
into two voice commands: “Search Contacts”
and when asked, “John Smith.” Please
remember, the Uconnect Phone works best
when you talk in a normal conversational tone,
as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet/
meters away from you.
HELP COMMAND
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want
to know your options at any prompt, say “Help”
following the beep.
To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle, simply
push the Phone button (if active) on your steering
wheel and say a command or say “Help”. All
Uconnect Phone sessions begin with a push of the
VR button or Phone button on the radio faceplate.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to do
so. Failure to do so may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
5
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 101
102 MULTIMEDIA
CANCEL COMMAND
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel”
and you will be returned to the main menu.
You can also push the VR button or Phone button
on your steering wheel when the system is listening
for a command and be returned to the main or
previous menu.
PAIR (LINK) UCONNECT PHONE TO A MOBILE
PHONE
To begin using your Uconnect Phone, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth®-enabled mobile
phone. Mobile phone pairing is the process of
establishing a wireless connection between a
cellular phone and the Uconnect system.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to
reference your mobile phone’s manual. Please
visit
UconnectPhone.com for complete mobile
phone compatibility information.
Uconnect 3/3 NAV With 5-inch Display
NOTE:
You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your
phone to complete this procedure.
The vehicle must be in PARK or at a standstill.
Follow the steps below to pair your phone:
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
position.
2. Push the Phone button.
NOTE:
If there are no phones currently connected
with the system, a pop-up will appear asking
if you would like to pair a mobile phone.
This pop-up only appears when the user
enters phone mode and no other device(s)
have previously been paired. If the system
has a phone previously paired, even if no
phone is currently connected with the
system, this pop-up will not appear.
3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process.
4. Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone.
Press the Settings button on your mobile
phone.
Select Bluetooth® and ensure it is enabled.
Once enabled, the mobile phone will begin
to search for Bluetooth® connections.
5. If “No” is selected and you still would like to
pair a mobile phone, press the Pairing or
Settings button from the Uconnect Phone
main screen.
Press the Add Device button.
Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone (see
below). When prompted on the phone,
select “Uconnect” and accept the connec-
tion request.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 102
MULTIMEDIA 103
6. Uconnect Phone will display an in-progress
screen while the system is connecting.
7. When your mobile phone finds the Uconnect
system, select “Uconnect.”
8. When prompted on the mobile phone, accept
the connection request from Uconnect Phone.
9. When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite
phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this phone
the highest priority. This phone will take
precedence over other paired phones within
range and will connect to the Uconnect system
automatically when entering the vehicle. Only
one mobile phone and/or one Bluetooth®
audio device can be connected to the
Uconnect system at a time. If “No” is selected,
simply select “Uconnect” from the mobile
phone/audio device Bluetooth® screen, and
the Uconnect system will reconnect to the
Bluetooth® device.
NOTE:
For phones which are not made a favorite, the
phone priority is determined by the order in which
it was paired. The latest phone paired will have the
higher priority.
NOTE:
During the pairing procedure, you may receive a
pop-up on your mobile phone for the Uconnect
System to access your “messages” and “contacts”.
Selecting “Ok” or “Allow” will sync your contacts
with the Uconnect System.
You can also use the following VR command to
bring up the Paired Phone screen from any screen
on the radio:
“Show Paired Phones”
NOTE:
Software updates on your phone or the Uconnect
system may interfere with the Bluetooth®
connection. If this happens, simply repeat the
pairing process. However, first, make sure to
delete the device from the list of phones on your
Uconnect system. Next, be sure to remove
Uconnect from the list of devices in your phone’s
Bluetooth® settings.
PAIR A BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIO
DEVICE
1. Press the Media button on the faceplate to
begin.
2. Change the source to “Bluetooth®”.
3. Press the Bluetooth® button on the
touchscreen to display the Paired Audio
Devices screen.
4. Press the Add Device button on the
touchscreen.
NOTE:
If there is no device currently connected with the
system, a pop-up will appear.
5. Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled audio device. When
prompted on the device, or confirm the PIN
shown on the Uconnect screen.
6. Uconnect Phone will display an in-process
screen while the system is connecting.
7. When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite
device. Selecting “Yes” will make this device
the highest priority. This device will take
precedence over other paired devices within
range.
NOTE:
For devices which are not made a favorite, the
device priority is determined by the order in which
it was paired. The latest device paired will have the
higher priority.
You can also use a following VR command to bring
up a list of paired audio devices:
“Show Paired Phones”
5
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 103
104 MULTIMEDIA
CONNECTING TO A PARTICULAR MOBILE
PHONE OR AUDIO DEVICE AFTER PAIRING
Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to the
highest priority paired phone and/or Audio Device
within range. If you need to choose a particular
phone or audio device follow these steps:
1. Press the
Settings
button on the faceplate.
2. Press the Paired Phones/Audio Sources
buttons.
3. Press to select the particular phone or the
particular audio device. A pop-up menu will
appear; press “Connect Phone”.
4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
DISCONNECTING OR DELETING A PHONE OR
AUDIO DEVICE
Uconnect 3/3 NAV With 5-inch Display
1. Press the Uconnect Phone Pairing or Settings
button on the faceplate.
2. Press the Paired Phones/Audio Sources
button.
3. Press the Settings button located to the right
of the device name for a different phone or
audio device than the currently connected
device or press the preferred Connected
Phone from the list.
4. The option’s pop-up will be displayed.
5. Press the Disconnect Device or the Delete
Device button on the touchscreen.
6. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
MAKING A PHONE OR AUDIO DEVICE A
FAVORITE
1. On the Paired Phone/Audio sources screen,
press the Settings button located to the right
of the device name for a different phone or
audio device than the currently connected
device or press the preferred Connected
Phone from the list.
2. The option’s pop-up will be displayed.
3. Press the Make Favorite button on the
touchscreen; you will see the chosen device
move to the top of the list.
4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
PHONEBOOK DOWNLOAD (AUTOMATIC
PHONEBOOK TRANSFER FROM MOBILE
PHONE) — IF EQUIPPED
If supported by your phone, Uconnect Phone has
the ability to download contact names and number
entries from the mobile phone’s phonebook.
Specific Bluetooth® Phones with Phonebook
Access Profile may support this feature. Your
mobile phone may receive a pop-up asking for
permission for the Uconnect System to access your
messages and contacts. Selecting “Ok” or “Allow”
will sync your contacts with the Uconnect System.
See the Uconnect website,
UconnectPhone.com,
for supported phones.
To call a name from a downloaded mobile
phonebook, Ú page 108.
Automatic download and update of a phone-
book, if supported, begins as soon as the
Bluetooth® wireless phone connection is made
to the Uconnect Phone, for example, after you
start the vehicle.
A maximum of 5,000 contact names with four
numbers per contact will be downloaded and
updated every time a phone is connected to the
Uconnect Phone.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 104
MULTIMEDIA 105
Depending on the maximum number of entries
downloaded, there may be a short delay before
the latest downloaded names can be used. Until
then, if available, the previously downloaded
phonebook is available for use.
Only the phonebook of the currently connected
mobile phone is accessible.
This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited
or deleted on the Uconnect Phone. These can
only be edited on the mobile phone. The
changes are transferred and updated to
Uconnect Phone on the next phone connection.
MANAGING YOUR FAVORITES — IF EQUIPPED
There are two ways you can add an entry to your
favorites:
1. After loading the mobile phonebook, press
the Favorites button on the touchscreen, and
then press one of the +Add Favorite Contact
buttons that appears on the list.
2. After loading the mobile phonebook, select
“Contacts” from the Phone main screen, and
then select the appropriate number. Press the
Down Arrow button next to the selected
number to display the options pop-up. In the
pop-up, select “Add to Favorites”.
NOTE:
If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked to
remove an existing favorite.
TO REMOVE A FAVORITE — IF EQUIPPED
1. To remove a Favorite, select “Favorites” from
the Phone main screen.
2. Next, select the Down Arrow icon next to the
contact you want to remove from your
favorites. This will bring up the options for that
Favorite contact.
3. Deselect the Star icon to delete the Favorite.
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through
the Uconnect Phone if the feature(s) are available
and supported by Bluetooth® on your mobile
service plan. For example, if your mobile service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the Uconnect Phone. Check with
your mobile service provider for the features that
you have.
Listed below are the phone options with Uconnect
Phone:
Redial
Dial by pressing in the number
Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name, Call
by Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial or Call
Back)
Favorites
Mobile Phonebook
Recent Call Log
SMS Message Viewer
CALL CONTROLS
The touchscreen allows you to control the following
call features:
Uconnect 3/3 NAV With 5-inch Display
1 — Answer
2 — Mute/Unmute
3 — Ignore
4 — Transfer
5
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 105
106 MULTIMEDIA
Other phone call features include:
End Call
Hold/Unhold/Resume
Swap two active calls
KEY PAD NUMBER ENTRY
1. Press the Phone button on the faceplate.
2. Press the Dial/Keypad button on the
touchscreen.
3. The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed.
4. Use the numbered buttons on the
touchscreens to enter the number and press
“Dial/Call”.
RECENT CALLS
You may browse a list of the most recent of each of
the following call types:
All Calls
Incoming Calls or Calls Received
Outgoing Calls or Calls Made
Missed Calls
Calls without a reply
These can be accessed by pressing the Recent
Calls button on the phone main screen.
You can also push the VR button on your steering
wheel and perform the above operation. For
example, say “Show my incoming calls”.
ANSWER OR IGNORE AN INCOMING CALL —
NO CALL CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the
Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio
system. Push the Uconnect Phone button on the
steering wheel, press the Answer button on the
touchscreen.
Uconnect 3/3 NAV With 5-inch Display
ANSWER OR IGNORE AN INCOMING CALL —
CALL CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS
If a call is currently in progress and you have
another incoming call, you will hear the same
network tones for call waiting that you normally
hear when using your mobile phone. Push the
Uconnect Phone button on the steering wheel,
press the Answer button on the touchscreen, or
press the Caller ID box to place the current call on
hold and answer the incoming call.
NOTE:
Phones that are compatible with the Uconnect
system in the market today do not support
rejecting an incoming call when another call is in
progress. Therefore, the user can only answer an
incoming call or ignore it.
PLACE/RETRIEVE A CALL FROM HOLD
During an active call, press the Hold or Call On Hold
button on the Phone main screen.
MAKING A SECOND CALL WHILE CURRENT
CALL IS IN PROGRESS
You can place a call on hold by pressing the Hold
button on the Phone main screen, then dial a
number from the keypad, recent calls, SMS Inbox
or from the phonebooks.
To go back to the first call: Ú page 107
To combine two calls: Ú page 107
1 — Answer Button
2 — Caller ID Box
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 106
MULTIMEDIA 107
TOGGLING BETWEEN CALLS — IF EQUIPPED
Uconnect 3/3 NAV With 5-inch Display
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press the Swap Calls button on the Phone
main screen. Only one call can be placed on hold
at a time.
You can also push the Phone button to toggle
between the active and held phone call.
JOIN CALLS
When two calls are in progress (one active and one
on hold), press the Join/Merge Calls Call button
the Phone main screen to combine all calls into a
conference call.
CALL TERMINATION
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the
End Call button on the touchscreen or the Phone
End button on the steering wheel. Only the active
call(s) will be terminated and if there is a call on
hold, it will become the new active call.
REDIAL
Press the Redial button on the touchscreen, or
push the VR button and after the “Listening”
prompt and the following beep, say “Redial.”
The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that
was dialed from your mobile phone.
CALL CONTINUATION
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call
on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition
has been switched to OFF.
NOTE:
The call will remain within the vehicle audio system
until the phone becomes out of range for the
Bluetooth® connection. It is recommended to
press the Transfer button on the touchscreen
when leaving the vehicle.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
TRANSFER CALL TO AND FROM MOBILE
PHONE
The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be
transferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect
Phone without terminating the call. To transfer an
ongoing call from your connected mobile phone to the
Uconnect Phone or vice versa, press the Transfer
button on the Phone main screen.
Things You Should Know About Uconnect
Phone
VOICE COMMAND
For the best performance:
Always wait for the beep before speaking
Speak normally, without pausing, just as you
would speak to a person sitting a few feet/
meters away from you
Ensure that no one other than you is speaking
during a voice command period
Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
Low Road Noise
Smooth Road Surface
Fully Closed Windows
Dry Weather Conditions
5
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 107
108 MULTIMEDIA
Even though the system is designed for many
languages and accents, the system may not always
work for some.
NOTE:
It is recommended that you do not store names in
your Favorites phonebook while the vehicle is in
motion.
Number and name recognition rate is optimized
when the entries are not similar. You can say “O”
(letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.
Audio Performance
Audio quality is maximized under:
Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
Low Road Noise
Smooth Road Surface
Fully Closed Windows
Dry Weather Conditions
Operation From The Driver's Seat
Performance such as audio clarity, echo, and
loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and
network, and not the Uconnect Phone.
Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by
lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
Phone Voice Commands
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is
easy with Uconnect. When the Phonebook button
is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system is
ready. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile
phone compatibility and pairing instructions.
Push the Phone button and wait for the beep to
say a command. See some examples below:
“
Call John Smith”
“Dial 123 456 7890”
“Redial” (call previous outgoing phone number)
“
Call back” (call previous incoming phone
number)
Did You Know: When providing a Voice Command,
push the Phone button and say “
Call”, then
pronounce the name
exactly as it appears in your
phone book. When a contact has multiple phone
numbers, you can say “
Call John Smith work”.
Voice Text Reply — If Equipped
Uconnect can announce
incoming text messages.
Push the VR button or Phone button and
say:
1. “
Listen
” to have the system read an incoming
text message. (Must have compatible mobile
phone paired to Uconnect system.)
2. “Reply” after an incoming text message has
been read.
Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the
beep, repeat one of the predefined messag-
es and follow the system prompts.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume
all risks related to the use of the Uconnect
features and applications in this vehicle. Only
use Uconnect when it is safe to do so. Failure to
do so may result in an accident involving serious
injury or death.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 108
MULTIMEDIA 109
NOTE:
Only use the numbering listed in the provided
table. Otherwise, the system will not transpose the
message.
Did You Know: Your mobile phone must have the
full implementation of the
Message Access Profile
(MAP) to take advantage of this feature. For details
about MAP, visit
UconnectPhone.com.
Apple® iPhone® iOS 5 or later supports reading
incoming text messages only. For further
information on how to enable this feature on your
Apple® iPhone®, refer to your iPhone® “User
Manual”.
Did You Know: Voice Text Reply is not compatible
with iPhone®, but if your vehicle is equipped with
Siri® Eyes Free, you can use your voice to send a
text message.
Siri® Eyes Free — If Equipped
When used with your Apple® iPhone® connected
to your vehicle, Siri lets you use your voice to send
text messages, select media, place phone calls
and much more. Siri uses your natural language to
understand what you mean and responds back to
confirm your requests. The system is designed to
keep your eyes on the road and your hands on the
wheel by letting Siri help you perform useful tasks.
To enable Siri, push and hold, then release the
Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) button on the
steering wheel. After you hear a double beep, you
can ask Siri to play podcasts and music, get
directions, read text messages, and many other
useful requests.
BLUETOOTH® COMMUNICATION LINK
Mobile phones may lose connection to the
Uconnect Phone. When this happens, the
connection can generally be re-established by
restarting the mobile phone. Your mobile phone is
recommended to remain in Bluetooth® ON mode.
POWER-UP
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either
the ON/RUN or ACC position, or after a language
change, you must wait at least 15 seconds prior to
using the system Ú page 245.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY
RESPONSES
Yes.
Stuck in
traffic.
See you later.
No.
Start without
me.
I’ll be late.
Okay.
Where are
you?
I will be 5 <or
10, 15, 20,
25, 30, 45,
60> minutes
late.
Call me.
Are you there
yet?
I’ll call you
later.
I need
directions.
See you in 5
<or 10, 15,
20, 25, 30,
45, 60>
minutes.
I’m on my way.
Can’t talk right
now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
5
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 109
110 MULTIMEDIA
NAVIGATION MODE — IF EQUIPPED
OPERATING NAVIGATION MODE —
I
F EQUIPPED
Planning A Route
Using the search bar provides a wide range of ways
to find places and then navigate to them. You can
search for your destination in different ways:
A specific address
A partial address
A type of place
A zip code
A city to navigate to a city center
A Point of Interest (POI) near your current location
Latitude and longitude coordinates
Using Search
Press the Search button in the Main menu to
start searching. The search screen will open,
displaying the keyboard and the following buttons:
Navigation Search
1 — Back Button
2 — Search Box
3 — Type Of Search
4 — View Button
5 — 123?! Button
6 — Keyboard Layout Button
7 — List/Map Button
8 — Show/Hide Keyboard Button
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 110
MULTIMEDIA 111
Feature Description
Back Button Press the Back button to return to the previous screen.
Search Box
Enter your search term in the search input box. As you type, matching
addresses and Points of Interest (POI) are shown.
Type Of Search
Press this button to change the type of search to any of the following:
Whole Map: Select this option to search your current map with no limit to
the search radius. Your current location is the center of the search. The
results are ranked by exact match.
Near Me: Select this option to search with your current GPS location as the
search center. The results are ranked by distance.
In Town or City: Select this option to use a town or city as the center of your
search. Enter the town or city name using the keyboard on the touchscreen.
When you have selected the town or city from the results list, you can search
for an address or POI in that city.
Along Route: When a route has been planned, you can select this option to
search along your route for a specific type of location, such as a POI cate-
gory. When prompted, enter the type of location and then select it in the
right-hand column to carry out the search.
Near Destination: When a route has been planned, you can select this
option to use your destination as the center of your search.
Latitude Longitude: Select this option to enter a pair of latitude and longi-
tude coordinates.
NOTE:
By default, the current map is searched. Once you have used search, the last
search type you selected is used.
5
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 111
112 MULTIMEDIA
Planning A Route — Searching For A City Center
When planning a route to a city center, you can
search for a town, city, or postal code.
1. Enter the name of the city or town.
Searching For A City Center
2. Select the Points Of Interest tab.
Addresses List
3. Select the city center POI.
City Center
NOTE:
The city center location is shown on the map.
4. Select “Drive”.
View Button Press this button to return to the Map View or Guidance View.
Show/Hide Keyboard Button Press this button to show or hide the keyboard.
List/Map Button
Select this button to switch between showing the results in a list or showing
the results on the map.
Keyboard Layout Button Press this button to change your keyboard layout to another language.
123?! Button
Press this button to use numbers and symbols on your keyboard. Select the =\<
button to toggle between the numbers and more symbols. Select the ABC button
to go back to the general keyboard.
Feature Description
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 112
MULTIMEDIA 113
Drive Button
As soon as you start driving, the Guidance View is
shown automatically.
Planning A Route — Searching For A POI
You can search for a POI type, such as a restaurant
or tourist attraction. Alternatively, you can search
for a specific POI Ú page 125.
1. Use the keyboard to enter the name of the
POI.
NOTE:
When searching, the whole map is selected. If you
want to change how the search is done, select the
button to the right of the search box. You can then
change where the search is done. For example,
along the route or in a city.
2. Select a POI category, such as “Restaurant”. If
you select a POI category, only POIs from that
category are shown. You can then select an
the desired POI. The location is shown on the
map.
3. To see more information about the POI, select
the POI on the map and then select the Pop-up
Menu button. Select “More Information” on
the pop-up menu.
4. To plan a route to this destination, select the
Drive button.
Drive Button
Planning A Route — Searching By Entering
Coordinates
1. Press the Search Type button.
2. Select “Latitude Longitude”.
3. Type in the pair of coordinates:
Decimal values
Degrees, minutes and seconds
GPS standard coordinates
4. Select a suggestion for the destination.
5. To plan a route, select the Drive button.
Planning A Route Using The Map
1. Move the map and zoom in until you can see
the desired destination.
2. Select the destination by pressing and holding
the screen for about one second.
NOTE:
A pop-up menu shows the nearest address.
3. To plan a route to this destination, select the
Drive button.
5
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 113
114 MULTIMEDIA
Planning A Route Using My Places
1. Select the Main Menu button.
2. Select “My Places”.
3. Select the Place you want to navigate to. For
example: Home.
My Places
4. To plan a route to this Place, select the Drive
button.
Finding A Parking Lot
1. Press the Parking button from the Main
Menu.
NOTE:
If a route is planned, the map shows parking lots
near your destination. If a route isn’t planned, the
map shows parking lots near your current location.
You also have an option to view the parking lots in
a list by pressing the Menu button.
2. Select a parking lot from the map or the list.
Find A Parking Lot
3. To plan a route to your chosen parking lot,
select the drive button.
Finding A Gas Station
1. Press the Main Menu button.
2. Select “Gas Station”.
NOTE:
You also have an option to view the gas stations in
a list by pressing the Menu button.
Find A Gas Station
3. Select a gas station from the map or the list. By
opening the pop-up menu, you can add the gas
station as a stop on your route. You can also
plan a route to your chosen gas station by
pressing the Drive button. Your system will
plan a route, and guidance to your destination
will begin. The Guidance View will be shown
automatically once you start driving.
Changing Your Route
MAKING CHANGES TO YOUR ROUTE
After planning a route, the route and destination
can be changed. There are various ways to change
the route without the need to completely replan
the entire journey.
To change the current route, press the Current
Route button in the main menu.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 114
MULTIMEDIA 115
CURRENT ROUTE MENU
Route Option Description
Clear Route
Press the button to clear the currently planned route. The Current Route
Menu will close, and the screen will return to the Map View.
Find Alternative
Press the button while driving on a planned route to show up to three
alternative routes on the Map View. Each alternative route shows the
difference in travel time.
Select the chosen route by tapping on the time pop-up.
Press “Let’s GO”. Guidance to the destination will automatically begin, and
the Guidance View appears automatically as you begin driving.
Avoid Blocked Road
Press the button to avoid an unexpected obstacle that is blocking the road
on the route. A new route will be found that avoids blocked roads.
You may be shown a maximum of two alternatives depending on the road
network between you and your destination.
The new route is shown on the Map View with the difference in travel time in a
pop-up.
Select the new route by pressing the time pop-up. Guidance to your
destination will resume avoiding blocked roads, and the Guidance View will
appear automatically as you begin driving.
NOTE:
It may not be possible to find an alternative route around the blocked road if
none exists.
5
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 115
116 MULTIMEDIA
Avoid Part Of Road
Press the button to avoid part of the current route.
You are shown a list of the sections that make up your current route.
Select the section of the route you want to avoid. A pop-up menu will appear
on the map showing the location of the instruction.
To avoid the chosen section of the route, select “Avoid”. A new route is
planned that will avoid the chosen route sections, and the new route will
appear in Map View.
NOTE:
To avoid more sections of the route, repeat the steps above. It may not be
possible to find an alternative route around the section if none exists.
Avoid Toll Roads And More
Select the button to avoid some types of route features that are on your
currently planned route. These include ferries, toll roads and unpaved roads.
Show Instructions
Press the button to see a list of turn-by-turn instructions for the planned
route.
The instructions include the following information:
Current location
Street names
Up to two road numbers shown in road signs (if available)
An instruction arrow
An instruction description
The distance between two consecutive instructions
Exit number
The full addresses of stops on your route
Route Option Description
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 116
MULTIMEDIA 117
Add Stop To Route
Press the button to add a stop to the route.
You can add a stop by selecting a point on the map. In Map View, zoom in on
the map and press and hold to select a location. Then, select the pop-up
menu button and press “Add to Current Route”.
You route will be recalculated to include your stop.
Change Route Type
Press the button to change the type of route used to plan the route. The
route will be recalculated using the new route type selected.
You can select the following types of routes:
Fastest Route
Shortest Route
Most Eco-Friendly Route
Avoid Interstate Highways
You can set the default route type in the Settings menu.
Reorder Stops
Press the button to see the list of stops for your current route. You can
change the order of the stops on your route by pressing “Edit Stops”. Use the
Up and Down arrows to change the order of your stops. The route will be
recalculated with the stops in that changed order.
NOTE:
You can also delete stops from the route by pressing the Edit Stops button and
then press the Delete button. The stop will be removed from the route, and the
route will be recalculated.
Route Option Description
5
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 117
118 MULTIMEDIA
Voice Command — If Equipped
ABOUT VOICE COMMAND
Instead of pressing the touchscreen to control your
Navigation system, you can use your voice to
control navigation.
For example, to switch to 2D view, you can say
“2D view”.
To view a list of available commands, press the
Help button in the Main menu and then press
“What can I say?”.
USING VOICE CONTROL
The following example shows how to use voice
control to plan a journey to your Home address:
1. Push the Voice Recognition button on the
steering wheel to turn on the microphone.
A screen will pop up with examples of com-
mands.
NOTE:
Press the Help button in the Main menu then press
“What can I say?” to see a full list of commands.
2. When you hear a beep, say a command of your
choice. For example, you can say “Navigate
home”.
Pay Route or Track Preview
Press button to watch a preview of the planned route or track.
NOTE:
This feature is not available while driving.
Stop Route Preview
Press button to stop the preview of the planned route.
Route Option Description
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume
all risks related to the use of the Uconnect
features and applications in this vehicle. Only
use Uconnect when it is safe to do so. Failure to
do so may result in an accident involving serious
injury or death.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 118
MULTIMEDIA 119
NOTE:
For accurate results, speak normally without trying
to articulate words in an unnatural way. If there is
excessive road noise, for example, you may need
to speak directly into the microphone.
3. If the command is correct, say “Yes”.
NOTE:
If the command is incorrect, say “No” and repeat
the command after you hear the prompt and tone
again. Your Navigation system plans a route from
your current location to your destination. To stop
your Navigation system from listening out for
further commands, say “Cancel”.
Guidance View
The Guidance View is used to guide you along the
route to your destination. As soon as you start
driving, your Navigation system will immediately
start guiding you to your destination with spoken
instructions and visual instructions on the
touchscreen. You can also see your current
location and details along your route, including 3D
buildings in some cities. The Guidance View is
normally in 3D. To show a 2D map with the map
moving in your direction of travel, change the 2D
and 3D default settings Ú page 123.
NOTE:
When you have planned a route and the 3D
Guidance View is shown, select the switch view
button to change to the Map View and use the
interactive features.
Guidance View
1 — Switch View Button
2 — Instruction Panel
3 — Route Bar
4 — Zoom Button
5 — Main Menu Button
6 — Speed Panel
7 — Current Location
5
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 119
120 MULTIMEDIA
Feature Description
Switch View Button
Select the Switch View button to change between the Map View and the
Guidance View.
Instruction Panel
Press this button to view the following information:
The direction of your next turn
The distance to your next turn
Lane guidance at some intersections
Route Bar
The Route Bar is shown when you have planned a route. The Route Bar
contains arrival information, such as the estimated time of arrival, the length
of drive time from your current location, and information about the next stop,
if you have stops on the route. The bottom of the Route Bar represents the
current location and shows the distance to the next stop on your route.
Current Location
This symbol shows the current location. By pressing the icon, the location will
be saved.
Speed Panel
Press the Speed Panel button to view the following information (if available):
The speed limit at your location
The name of the street you are driving on
NOTE:
If you drive more than 3 mph (5 km/h) over the speed limit, the Speed Panel
turns red. If you drive less than 3 mph (5 km/h) over the speed limit, the Speed
Panel turns orange.
Main Menu Button Press the Main Menu button to show the main menu.
Zoom Button Press the zoom in + button to zoom in and the zoom out – button to zoom out.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 120
MULTIMEDIA 121
Advanced Lane Guidance
NOTE:
Lane guidance is not available for all intersections
or in all countries.
Your Navigation system helps you prepare for
highway exits and junctions by showing the correct
driving lane for your planned route.
As you approach an exit or junction, the lane you
need is shown on the screen and in the instruction
panel.
There are two types of lane guidance:
Lane images
Instructions in the status bar
Advanced Lane Guidance
Map View
The Map View is shown when you have no planned
route. You can use Map View the same way as you
might look at a traditional paper map. You can
move around the map using gestures, and zoom
using the zoom buttons. The map shows your
current location and many other locations such as
your My Places Ú page 126.
Map View
1 — Back Button
2 — Switch View Button
3 — Zoom Button
4 — Main Menu Button
5 — Selected Locations
6 — Current Location
7 — Your Route
5
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 121
122 MULTIMEDIA
Feature Description
Back Button
Press the Back button to return to an overview of the route. If no route is
planned, pressing this button moves the map to put your current location at
the center.
Map Symbols
Symbols are used on the map to show the destination and saved places
Ú page 126.
Map symbols include:
Your destination
Your home location
A stop on your route
A location saved in My Places
Traffic Information — If Equipped
Select the Traffic Information button to display information about traffic
delays.
Selected Location
Press and hold the Selected Location button to select a location on the map.
Select the Pop-up Menu button to show options for the location, or select the
Drive button to plan a route to the location.
Current Location This symbol shows your current location on the map.
Your Route
If you have a planned route, it will appear on the map. You can select the route
to clear it, change the route type, add a stop, or save changes to your route
Ú page 114.
Main Menu Button Press the Main Menu button to open the main menu.
Zoom Button Press the zoom in + button to zoom in and the zoom out – button to zoom out.
Switch View Button
Press the Switch View button to change between the Map View and the
Guidance View.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 122
MULTIMEDIA 123
Voices
ABOUT VOICES
Your Navigation system uses sound for some or all
of the following:
Driving directions
Warnings that you set
By selecting “Settings” in the main menu, then
selecting “Voices,” you can change the settings for
how voice instructions are given. Instruction
settings include the following:
Read Early Instructions Out Loud: This setting
allows to you to hear early instructions. For
example, an early instruction could be, “After
two miles, take the exit right”.
Read Road Numbers Out Loud (if equipped):
Use this setting to control whether road
numbers are read out loud as part of navigation
instructions.
Read Road Sign Information Out Loud (if
equipped): Use this setting to control whether
road sign information is read out loud as part of
navigation instructions.
Read Street Names Out Loud (if equipped): Use
this setting to control whether street names are
read out loud as part of navigation instructions.
Read Foreign Street Names Out Loud (if
equipped): Use this setting to control whether
foreign street names are read out loud as part of
navigation instructions.
CHANGING THE VOLUME LEVEL
To change the volume of your Navigation system,
use the Volume knob on the radio when an
instruction is being given.
Settings
ABOUT SETTINGS
You can change the way your Navigation system
looks and behaves. Most of the settings on your
system can be accessed by pressing the Settings
button in the Main Menu.
APPEARANCE
To change how your navigation screen looks,
select “Appearance” in the settings menu. From
here, you can change these features:
Switch To Night Colors When Dark: Select this
setting to make your system automatically
switch to night colors when it gets dark.
Automatic Zoom: Select “Automatic Zoom” to
change how your system zooms in Guidance
View when you approach a turn or intersection.
Zooming in can make the turn or intersection
easier to drive. The following options are avail-
able:
Zoom in to next turn
Based on road type
None
ARRIVAL INFORMATION
In the settings menu, select “Arrival Information”
to change the following settings:
Show Remaining Distance: Select this setting to
show the remaining distance left to travel in the
arrival information panel during navigation.
Show Remaining Time: Select this setting to
show the remaining time left to travel in the
arrival information panel during navigation.
Switch Between Distance And Time Automati-
cally: Select this setting to control the automatic
switching between remaining distance and
remaining time in the arrival information panel.
5
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 123
124 MULTIMEDIA
SHOW ON ROUTE
In the settings menu, select “Show On Route” to
see any of the following options in the route bar:
Parking: Select this setting to see parking lots
on your route.
Gas Stations: Select this setting to see gas
stations on your route.
Stops: Select this setting to see stops on your
route.
SHOW PREVIEWS OF HIGHWAY EXITS
Select this setting to control the full screen preview
when you approach highway exits.
AUTOMATIC MAP VIEW SWITCHING
Automatic changing of views is on by default. For
example, when an alternative route is being
suggested, the map will automatically switch to
Map View, and when you start driving, your map
will automatically switch to Guidance View. You
can turn this feature off by selecting “Automatic
Map View Switching” in the settings.
AUTOMATIC ZOOM
Select this setting to control the full screen preview
when you approach highway exits.
GUIDANCE VIEW STYLE
Select this setting to choose between 3D and 2D
versions of the Guidance View. Both the 2D and 3D
Guidance Views move in your direction of travel.
In 3D Guidance View, you can choose to use the 3D
car icon or an arrowhead as the current location
indicator. By default, the 3D Guidance View shows
the 3D car icon.
VOICES SETTING
Select this setting to change how instructions are
read out loud Ú page 123.
ROUTE PLANNING
Select this setting to control how your system plans
routes. The following options are available:
Always Take the Fastest Route
You can choose whether you would like the
Navigation system to always default to the
fastest route.
Ask Me So I Can Choose
You can choose whether you would like the
Navigation system to allow you to pick the route
to the destination.
Don’t Ask me
You can choose whether you would like the
Navigation system to select the route to the
destination.
Fastest Route
You can choose whether you would like the
Navigation system to choose the fastest route to
the destination.
Shortest Route
You can choose whether you would like the
Navigation system to choose the shortest route
by distance to the destination.
Most Eco-Friendly Route
You can choose whether you would like the
Navigation system to choose the route that will
consume the least amount of energy.
Avoid Interstate Highways
You can choose whether you would like the
Navigation system to avoid all highways while
navigating to the destination.
SOUNDS AND WARNINGS
Select this setting to change the following sounds
and warnings:
Warning Type: You can choose the type of warn-
ings you want to hear when you are driving:
Warning Sounds: Hear only warning sounds
None: No warning sounds are given
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 124
MULTIMEDIA 125
Safety Warnings: You can change settings for
whether you want to be warned, never warned,
or warned only if you are speeding. The following
options are available:
When speeding: This warning is given when
you exceed the speed limit by more than
3 mph (5 km/h). When you are speeding,
the speed panel also turns red in the Guid-
ance View.
Driver Safety: Select this setting to make
some features locked while the vehicle is in
motion.
NOTE:
This feature increases safety by minimizing driver
distraction. When driver safety is on, a message
tells you when the lock is enabled.
SYSTEM
Select this setting to reset all other settings.
Selecting “Reset” will delete all saved places and
settings and restore the standard settings. This
includes the language, voice settings, warning
settings, and theme.
NOTE:
This is not a software update and will not affect the
version of the software application installed on
your Uconnect system.
Points Of Interest
ABOUT POINTS OF INTEREST
Points Of Interest (POI) are useful places on the
map.
Here are some examples:
Restaurants
Hotels
Museums
Parking lots
Gas stations
Emergency Services
USING POIS TO PLAN A ROUTE
When you plan a route, you can use a POI for the
destination or as a stop along the route.
Using Search
1. Select “Search” on the Main Menu to begin a
search. The search screen will open,
displaying the keyboard. Enter the name of
your desired destination. Your search results
will be displayed in two lists. Addresses and
city matches are shown in the list called
“Addresses.” POIs, types of POIs, and Places
are shown in the list called “Points of
Interest.” You can also select a POI category
to only see POI search results from that
category.
2. Select the desired POI. The location will appear
on the map. From here, you can save the POI
to “My Places,” use this POI as a starting point,
begin navigation to this destination, or view
more details about this POI. By pressing “More
Information,” you can view the phone number
and full address of the POI.
3. If a route is already planned, you can add the
location to your current route. To plan a route
to this destination, press the Drive button on
the touchscreen.
NOTE:
Your Navigation system will calculate a route, and
guidance to your destination will begin. Guidance
View will begin as soon as you start driving.
5
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 125
126 MULTIMEDIA
My Places
ABOUT MY PLACES
My Places provides an easy way to select a
location without the need to enter the address or
search for the location. You can use My Places to
create a collection of useful or favorite addresses.
The following items are always in My Places:
Home: Your home location can be your home
address or somewhere you often visit. This
feature provides an easy way to navigate there.
Recent Destinations: Select this button to select
your destination from a list of locations you have
recently navigated to.
USING MY PLACES
You can use My Places as a way of navigating to a
place without having to enter the address. To
navigate to a saved destination in My Places,
follow these steps:
1. Press the touchscreen to bring up the main
menu, and press “My Places”.
2. Select the desired destination. The location
will appear on the map with a pop-up menu.
3. Press the Drive button to begin navigation to
this destination.
NOTE:
Your Navigation system immediately starts guiding
you to your destination with spoken instructions
and visual instructions on the touchscreen.
ADDING A LOCATION TO MY PLACES
Adding From My Places
1. In the Main menu, press “My Places”.
2. Press “Add”.
Adding From My Places
3. To select a location, do one of the following:
Zoom in on the map at the location you want
to select. Press and hold to select the loca-
tion, then press the Add Location symbol.
Search for a location using the search func-
tion. Select “Show on Map,” then press the
Add Location symbol.
Adding A Location From The Map
1. In Map View, move the map and zoom in until
you can see the destination that you want to
navigate to.
2. Press and hold the point on the map to select
that location.
3. Press the three vertical dots to the right of the
name to open the pop-up menu.
4. Press “Add To My Places”.
Adding A Location To My Places
5. The name of the location will appear in the edit
screen. You can edit the name of the location
for easy recognition.
6. Press “Done” to save your location in the My
Places list.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 126
MULTIMEDIA 127
Adding A Location Using Search
1. In the Main Menu, press “Search”.
2. Enter the name or address of a location using
the touchscreen keyboard.
3. Select the desired location, and then press
“Show In Map”.
4. The Map View will show the location. Press the
pop-up menu button.
5. Press “Add to My Places”.
6. The name of the location will appear in the edit
screen. You can edit the name of the location
for easy recognition.
7. Press “Done” to save your location in the My
Places list.
Setting Your Home Location
1. In the Main Menu, press “My Places”.
2. Press “Home” .
3. To select a location for home, do one of the
following:
Zoom in on the map at the location you want
to select. Press and hold to select the loca-
tion, then press the home icon next to the
name of the location.
You can also search for a location using the
search function. Select “Set Home Loca-
tion.”
DELETING A LOCATION FROM MY PLACES
Deleting A Recent Destination From My Places
1. In the main menu, select “My Places”.
2. Press “Recent Destinations”.
3. Press “Edit List”.
4. Select the destination(s) you want to delete.
5. Press the Delete button.
Deleting A Location From My Places
1. In the main menu, select “My Places”.
2. Press “Edit List”.
3. Select the destination(s) you want to delete.
4. Press the Delete button.
Getting Help
Press the Help button in the Main menu or from
the Settings menu to see the following information:
About: Press this button to view information about
your Uconnect system. This information includes:
Serial number
Application version
Installed maps
Legal information, such as Copyright and
Licenses for EULA and Open Source
Important Safety Notices And Warnings
GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM
The Global Positioning System (GPS) is a
satellite-based system that provides location and
timing information around the globe. GPS is
operated and controlled under the sole
responsibility of the Government of the United
States of America, which is responsible for its
availability and accuracy. Any changes in GPS
availability and accuracy, or in environmental
conditions, may impact the operation of this
Navigation system. TomTom® does not accept any
liability for the availability and accuracy of GPS.
USE WITH CARE
Use of TomTom® navigation while driving still
means that you need to drive with due care and
attention.
SAFETY SETTINGS
We recommend using the safety settings to make
your driving as safe as possible. These are some of
the options included in the safety settings:
Show safety reminders
Warn when driving faster than allowed
You can also drive more safely by using voice
commands to control navigation Ú page 123.
5
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 127
128 MULTIMEDIA
Copyright Notices
© 2021 TomTom®. All rights reserved. TomTom®
and the "two hands" logo are registered
trademarks of TomTom® N.V. or one of its
subsidiaries. Please see
www.tomtom.com/
en_us/legal/
for warranties and end user license
agreements applying to this product.
© 2021 TomTom®. All rights reserved. This
material is proprietary and the subject of copyright
protection and/or database rights protection and/
or other intellectual property rights owned by
TomTom® or its suppliers. The use of this material
is subject to the terms of a license agreement. Any
unauthorized copying or disclosure of this material
will lead to criminal and civil liabilities.
Data Source © 2021 TomTom® All rights reserved.
The software included in this product contains
copyrighted software that is licensed under the
GPL. A copy of that license can be viewed in the
License section. You can obtain the complete
corresponding source code from us for a period of
three years after our last shipment of this product.
For more information, visit
https://
www.tomtom.com/en_gb/opensource
or
contact your local TomTom® customer support
team via
us.support.tomtom.com/app/
answers/list
. Upon request, we will send you a CD
with the corresponding source code.
Linotype, Frutiger and Univers are trademarks of
Linotype GmbH registered in the US Patent and
Trademark Office and may be registered in certain
other jurisdictions. MHei is a trademark of The
Monotype Corporation and may be registered in
certain jurisdictions.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS —
IF EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on
the back surface of the steering wheel. Reach
behind the wheel to access the switches.
Remote Sound System Controls
The right-hand control is a rocker type switch with
a push button in the center. Pushing the top of the
switch will increase the volume, and pushing the
bottom of the switch will decrease the volume.
The push button located in the center of the
right-hand control to select the source (AM, FM,
SiriusXM®, or USB)
The left-hand control is a rocker type switch with a
push button in the center. The function of the left
hand control is different depending on which mode
you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control
operation in each mode.
RADIO OPERATION
Pushing the top of the switch will seek up for the
next available station and pushing the bottom of
the switch will seek down for the next available
station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand
control will tune to the next preset station that you
have programmed in the radio preset button.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 128
MULTIMEDIA 129
MEDIA MODE
Pushing the top of the switch once goes to the next
track on the selected media (USB/Bluetooth®).
Pushing the bottom of the switch once goes to the
beginning of the current track, or to the beginning
of the previous track if it is within eight seconds
after the current track begins to play.
RAM TELEMATICS - IF EQUIPPED
Ram Telematics is designed to help improve
safety, efficiency, and productivity. It gives you
complete visibility of your fleet options, whether
from behind a desk or on a mobile device while you
are on the go. You can log-in to view near real-time
and historical activity, including location, vehicle
health, and driver performance.
Activating Ram Telematics In Your Vehicles
Before you get started you will need:
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) of each
vehicle you want to activate.
Your main user’s username and password; new
customers will be asked to register.
If you are a new customer, you will need
company credit card information or invoice
number as further proof of customer identifica-
tion. Don’t worry, you will not be charged.
Go to activate.verizonconnect.com/ram/
#login
. If you are an existing Verizon Connect
customer, enter your company’s log in creden-
tials. New customers will need to register to
create a new account.
Manually enter the VIN or upload a CSV file with
your VIN. A vehicle name is optional and can be
added later. Follow online instructions to
complete your vehicle entry.
Create a password and enter billing information.
An email will be sent to you to complete the final
step. After that, you will be ready to log-in and
access Verizon Connect Fleet!
You are good to go! You will receive an email
confirming your vehicles are now online.
For more information, or to learn more, visit
www.verizonconnect.com/ram/.
RAM TELEMATICS GENERAL
I
NFORMATION
Modification Statement
Marelli has not approved any changes or
modifications to this device by the user. Any
changes or modifications could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
Marelli n'approuve aucune modification apportée
à l'appareil par l'utilisateur, quelle qu'en soit la
nature. Tout changement ou modification peuvent
annuler le droit d'utilisation de l'appareil par
l'utilisateur.
5
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 129
130 MULTIMEDIA
Interference Statement
This device complies with Part 15, 22, 24, and 27
of the FCC and Industry Canada licence-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:(1) This device may not
cause interference, and(2) This device must
accept any interference, including interference
that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:(1) l'appareil ne doit
pas produire de brouillage, et(2) l'utilisateur de
l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique subi, même si le broulliage est
susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
RF Exposure
This equipment complies with FCC and IC radiation
exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
environment. The antenna should be installed and
operated with minimum distance of 8 in (20) cm
between the radiator and your body.
Cet appareil est conforme aux limites d'exposition
aux rayonnements de la IC pour environnement
non contrôlé. L'antenne doit être installé de façon
à garder une distance minmale de 20 centimètres
entre la source de rayonnements et votre corps.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being
on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy
performance from your radio. This condition may
be lessened or eliminated by repositioning the
mobile phone within the vehicle. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
does not satisfactorily improve from repositioning
the mobile phone, it is recommended that the
volume be turned down or off during mobile phone
operation when not using the Uconnect system.
REGULATORY AND SAFETY
I
NFORMATION
US/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wireless
radio is far below the FCC and IC radio frequency
exposure limits. Nevertheless, the wireless radio
will be used in such a manner that the radio is 8 in
(20 cm) or further from the human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within
guidelines found in radio frequency safety
standards and recommendations, which reflect
the consensus of the scientific community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal
wireless radio is safe for use by consumers. The
level of energy emitted is far less than the
electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless
devices such as mobile phones. However, the use
of wireless radios may be restricted in some
situations or environments, such as aboard
airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are
encouraged to ask for authorization before turning
on the wireless radio Ú page 245.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 130
131
(Continued)
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
FOUR-WHEEL ANTI-LOCK BRAKE
S
YSTEM (ABS)
The ABS is designed to aid the driver in
maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking
conditions. The system operates with a separate
computer to modulate hydraulic pressure, to
prevent wheel lock-up and to help avoid skidding
on slippery surfaces.
The system's pump motor runs during an ABS stop
to provide regulated hydraulic pressure. The pump
motor makes a low humming noise during
operation, which is normal.
The ABS includes an amber ABS Warning Light.
When the light is illuminated, the ABS is not
functioning. The system reverts to standard
non-Anti-Lock Brakes. Turning the ignition OFF and
ON again may reset the ABS if the fault detected
was only momentary.
When you are in a severe braking condition
involving the use of the ABS, you will experience
some pedal drop as the vehicle comes to a stop.
This is the result of the system reverting to the
base brake system.
Engagement of the ABS may be accompanied by a
pulsing sensation. You may also hear a clicking
noise. These occurrences are normal and indicate
that the system is functioning properly.
WARNING!
The ABS contains sophisticated electronic
equipment that may be susceptible to interfer-
ence caused by improperly installed or high
output radio transmitting equipment. This
interference can cause possible loss of
anti-lock braking capability. Installation of
such equipment should be performed by qual-
ified professionals.
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer.
Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you
need to slow down or stop.
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it
increase braking or steering efficiency beyond
that afforded by the condition of the vehicle
brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
planing.
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner that could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.
WARNING!
6
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 131
132 SAFETY
(Continued)
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL (EBC)
S
YSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) system that
includes the Brake Assist System (BAS), Traction
Control System (TCS), Hill Start Assist (HSA),
Electronic Stability Control (ESC), Electronic Roll
Mitigation (ERM) and Trailer Sway Control (TSC). All
systems work together to enhance vehicle stability
and control in various driving conditions and are
commonly referred to as ESC.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers.
The system detects an emergency braking
situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake
application and then applies optimum pressure to
the brakes. This can help reduce braking
distances. The BAS complements the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To
receive the benefit of the system, you must apply
continuous braking pressure during the stopping
sequence (do not “pump” the brakes). Do not
reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no
longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released,
the BAS is deactivated.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
ESC enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC
corrects for over/under steering of the vehicle by
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to
counteract the above conditions. Engine power
may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain
the desired path.
Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more
than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less
than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the
vehicle path intended by the driver and compares
it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual
path does not match the intended path, ESC
applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to
assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer
condition.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded
by prevailing road conditions. BAS cannot
prevent collisions, including those resulting from
excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a
BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in
a reckless or dangerous manner, which could
jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of
others.
WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road condi-
tions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-
planing. ESC also cannot prevent accidents
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to
inappropriate driver input for the conditions.
Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC
equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner which could
jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 132
SAFETY 133
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC OFF Indicator Light
The ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light in the instrument cluster
will come on when the ignition switch is
turned to the MAR (ON/RUN) position for
four seconds. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light comes on continuously with the
engine running, a malfunction has been detected
in the ESC system. If this light remains on after
several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (km) at speeds greater than
30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as
soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed
and corrected.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
(located in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as
soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system
becomes active. The ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active. If
the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible.
Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the
prevailing road conditions.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates
the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is
in a reduced mode.
NOTE:
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on
momentarily each time the ignition switch
placed in the ON position.
Each time the ignition is placed in the ON posi-
tion, the ESC system will be on even if it was
turned off previously.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
ERM anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and
the speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines
that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle
and vehicle’s speed are sufficient to potentially
cause wheel lift, it then applies the appropriate
brake and may also reduce engine power to lessen
the chance that wheel lift will occur.
ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift
occurring during severe or evasive driving
maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift due to
other factors, such as road conditions, leaving the
roadway, or striking objects or other vehicles.
Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly
maintain your vehicle, may change the
handling characteristics of your vehicle, and
may negatively affect the performance of the
ESC system. Changes to the steering system,
suspension, braking system, tire type and size
or wheel size may adversely affect ESC perfor-
mance. Improperly inflated and unevenly worn
tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any
vehicle modification or poor vehicle mainte-
nance that reduces the effectiveness of the
ESC system can increase the risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road
conditions and driving conditions, influence the
chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM
cannot prevent all wheel lift or rollovers,
especially those that involve leaving the roadway
or striking objects or other vehicles. The
capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user's safety
or the safety of others.
6
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 133
134 SAFETY
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
HSA is designed to assist the driver when starting
a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain
the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a
short period of time after the driver takes their foot
off of the brake pedal. If the driver does not apply
the throttle during this short period of time, the
system will release brake pressure and the vehicle
will roll down the hill. The system will release brake
pressure in proportion to the amount of throttle
applied as the vehicle starts to move in the
intended direction of travel.
HSA ACTIVATION CRITERIA
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA
to activate:
The vehicle must be stopped.
The vehicle must be on a 5% (approximate)
grade or greater hill.
Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction
(i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear;
vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
HSA will work in REVERSE and all forward gears
when the activation criteria have been met. The
system will not activate if the vehicle is placed in
NEUTRAL or PARK.
Traction Control System (TCS)
TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and
engine power is reduced to provide enhanced
acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS
system, Brake Limited Differential (BLD) functions
similarly to a limited slip differential and controls
the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel on
a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the
system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel.
This will allow more engine torque to be applied to
the wheel that is not spinning. This feature remains
active even if TCS and ESC are in the “Partial Off”
mode Ú page 132.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) — If Equipped
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an
excessively swaying trailer and will take the
appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway.
The system may reduce engine power and apply
the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to counteract
the sway of the trailer.
NOTE:
TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always
use caution when towing a trailer and follow the
trailer tongue weight recommendations
Ú page 68.
When TSC is functioning, the ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light will flash, the engine
power may be reduced and you may feel the
brakes being applied to individual wheels to
attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is
disabled when the ESC system is in the “Partial
Off” mode.
WARNING!
There may be situations on minor hills with a
loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer, when
the system will not activate and slight rolling may
occur. This could cause a collision with another
vehicle or object. Always remember the driver is
responsible for braking the vehicle.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and
adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 134
SAFETY 135
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
(TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will
warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the
vehicle recommended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by
about 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This
means that when the outside temperature
decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire
pressure should always be set based on cold
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for
at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum
inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle
is driven — this is normal and there should be no
adjustment for this increased pressure.
See Ú page 217 on how to properly inflate the
vehicle’s tires.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure
if the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure
warning limit for any reason, including low
temperature effects and natural pressure loss
through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low
tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and
will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above
the recommended cold placard pressure. Once the
low tire pressure warning (TPMS Warning Light)
illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to
the recommended cold placard pressure in order
for the TPMS Warning Light to turn off. The system
will automatically update and the TPMS Warning
Light will turn off once the system receives the
updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa)
above the recommended cold placard pressure in
order to turn the TPMS Warning Light off.
For example, your vehicle may have a
recommended cold (parked for more than three
hours) placard pressure of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the
ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the
measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a
temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the
tire pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa).
This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn
on the TPMS Warning Light. Driving the vehicle
may cause the tire pressure to rise to
approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the TPMS
Warning Light will still be on. In this situation, the
TPMS Warning Light will turn off only after the tires
are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold
placard pressure value.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures
and warning have been established for the tire
size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable
system operation or sensor damage may
result when using replacement equipment
that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor
damage.
Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an
aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended
that you take your vehicle to an authorized
dealership to have your sensor function
checked.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the TPMS
sensor.
6
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 135
136 SAFETY
NOTE:
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire
care and maintenance or to provide warning of
a tire failure or condition.
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure
gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel effi-
ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility
to maintain correct tire pressure using an accu-
rate tire pressure gauge, even if underinflation
has not reached the level to trigger illumination
of the TPMS Warning Light.
Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire
pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual
tire pressure in the tire Ú page 245.
Base System
This is the TPMS Warning Light located
in the instrument cluster.
The TPMS uses wireless technology with
wheel rim mounted electronic sensors
to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted
to each wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit
tire pressure readings to the receiver module.
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check the tire
pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
Receiver module
Four TPMS sensors
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Low
Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
will illuminate in the instrument cluster, an audible
chime will be activated, and the “Check tire
pressure” text message will display when one or
more of the four active road tire pressures are low.
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as
possible, check the inflation pressure of each tire
on your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the
vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure
value. The system will automatically update and
the TPMS Warning Light will extinguish once the
updated tire pressures have been received. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this
information.
Check TPMS Warnings
The TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for 75
seconds and remain on solid when a system fault
is detected, an audible chime will be activated and
a proper text message will be displayed. If the
ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat
providing the system fault still exists. The TPMS
Warning Light will turn off when the fault condition
no longer exists. A system fault can occur with any
of the following scenarios:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same radio
frequencies as the TPMS sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window
tinting that affects radio wave signals.
3. Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS
sensors.
NOTE:
Your vehicle can be equipped with either a Tire
Service Kit, a compact spare tire or a regular size
spare tire (with or without original TPMS sensor).
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 136
SAFETY 137
1. Tire Service Kit (original tire sealant – if
equipped): After fixing the punctured tire with
original tire sealant, the original situation will
be restored, so system will turn off the
warning light during the normal drive.
2. Compact Spare Tire (if equipped): The
compact spare wheel is not equipped with a
TPMS sensor. So when mounted, during the
normal drive the system will turn on the
warning light (flashes for approximately 75
seconds then remains solid). This condition
persists until a wheel equipped with original
TPMS sensor has been mounted on the
vehicle.
3. Regular size spare tire (not equipped with
TPMS sensor): When mounted, during the
normal drive the system will turn on the telltale
(flashes for approximately 75 seconds then
remains solid). This condition persists until a
wheel equipped with original TPMS sensor has
been mounted on the vehicle. Then the system
will be restored and the warning light will turn
off during the normal drive.
4. Regular size spare tire (equipped with TPMS
sensor): When mounted, the warning light will
turn off during the normal drive.
5. In all the above cases, please check the
replacement tire inflation pressure before
driving your vehicle.
6. In case of tire replacement, if the vehicle is
driven for short periods of time, then the
system can take a while to be restored.
NOTE:
For a correct Tire Pressure Monitoring System
behavior, please wait for about 20 minutes in
key-off during each tire substitution.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Seat Belt Systems
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on others. If
you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer.
IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Please pay close attention to the information in
this section. It tells you how to use your restraint
system properly, to keep you and your passengers
as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to
minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should
always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a
vehicle with a rear seat.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the
vehicle seat belt properly must be secured in
the appropriate child restraint or
belt-positioning booster seat in a rear seating
position Ú page 166.
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a
rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the
front passenger seat, move the seat as far
back as possible and use the proper child
restraint Ú page 166.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt
behind them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with
your child restraint to make sure that you are
using it properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should
be moved back as far as practical to allow the
front air bags room to inflate.
6
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 137
138 SAFETY
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment
occurs, the side air bags will inflate forcefully
into the space between occupants and the
door and occupants could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person,
see Ú page 242 for customer service contact
information.
SEAT BELT SYSTEMS
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver,
even on short trips. Someone on the road may be
a poor driver and could cause a collision that
includes you. This can happen far away from home
or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and
they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a
collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when
people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce
the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused
by striking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a
motor vehicle should be belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind
the driver and outboard front seat
passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle
their seat belts. The BeltAlert feature is active
whenever the ignition switch is in the AVV/START
or MAR/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is
first in the AVV/START or MAR/RUN position, a
chime will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is
unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in the
AVV/START or MAR/RUN position the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both
outboard front seat belts are buckled. The outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when an
outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when
the vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle
speed range and the driver or outboard front seat
passenger is unbuckled (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front
passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the
outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied). The
BeltAlert warning sequence starts by blinking the
Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning
sequence has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder
Light will remain on until the seat belts are
buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence may
repeat based on vehicle speed until the driver and
occupied outboard front seat passenger seat belts
are buckled. The driver should instruct all
occupants to buckle their seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the
vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning sequence
will begin until the seat belts are buckled again.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 138
SAFETY 139
(Continued)
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not
active when the outboard front passenger seat is
unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered when an
animal or other items are placed on the outboard
front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat
(if equipped). It is recommended that pets be
restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat
belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an
authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not
recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is
unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn
on and remain on until the driver and outboard
front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped
with lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during
very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows
the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely
with you under normal conditions. However, in a
collision the seat belt will lock and reduce your risk
of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown
out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, the air bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even
though you have air bags.
In a collision, you and your passengers can
suffer much greater injuries if you are not
properly buckled up. You can strike the inte-
rior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you
can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be
sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside
or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly. Occupants,
including the driver, should always wear their
seat belts whether or not an air bag is also
provided at their seating position to minimize
the risk of severe injury or death in the event
of a crash.
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could
even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these
instructions to wear your seat belt safely and
to keep your passengers safe, too.
Two people should never be belted into a
single seat belt. People belted together can
crash into one another in a collision, hurting
one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder
belt or a lap belt for more than one person, no
matter what their size.
WARNING!
6
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 139
140 SAFETY
(Continued)
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back
and adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of
the front seat, and next to your arm in the rear
seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear seat).
Grab the latch plate and pull out the seat belt.
Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as
necessary to allow the seat belt to go around
your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert
the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
WARNING!
A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk
of injury in a collision. The seat belt forces
won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones,
but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap
part of your seat belt as low as possible and
keep it snug.
A twisted seat belt may not protect you prop-
erly. In a collision, it could even cut into you.
Be sure the seat belt is flat against your body,
without twists. If you can’t straighten a seat
belt in your vehicle, take it to an authorized
dealer immediately and have it fixed.
A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle
will not protect you properly. The lap portion
could ride too high on your body, possibly
causing internal injuries. Always buckle your
seat belt into the buckle nearest you.
A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too
far forward, increasing the possibility of injury.
Wear your seat belt snugly.
A seat belt that is worn under your arm is
dangerous. Your body could strike the inside
surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing
head and neck injury. A seat belt worn under
the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs aren’t
as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the seat belt
over your shoulder so that your strongest bones
will take the force in a collision.
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not
protect you from injury during a collision. You
are more likely to hit your head in a collision if
you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap and
shoulder belt are meant to be used together.
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immedi-
ately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat
belt system. If your vehicle is involved in a
collision, or if you have questions regarding
seat belt or retractor conditions, take your
vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or autho-
rized FCA Certified Collision Care Program
facility for inspection.
WARNING!
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 140
SAFETY 141
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies
low across your hips, below your abdomen. To
remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on
the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is
too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap
belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding
under the seat belt in a collision.
Positioning The Lap Belt
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder
and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it
is comfortable and not resting on your neck.
The retractor will withdraw any slack in the
shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button
on the buckle. The seat belt will automatically
retract to its stowed position. If necessary,
slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow
the seat belt to retract fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted
lap/shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to
the anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above
the latch plate, grab and twist the seat belt
webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that
begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded
webbing. The folded webbing must enter the
slot at the top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it
clears the folded webbing and the seat belt is
no longer twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and outboard front passenger seats,
the top of the shoulder belt can be adjusted
upward or downward to position the seat belt away
from your neck. Push or squeeze the anchorage
button to release the anchorage, and move it up or
down to the position that serves you best.
Adjustable Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower
position, and if you are taller than average, you will
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a higher
position. After you release the anchorage button,
try to move it up or down to make sure that it is
locked in position.
6
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 141
142 SAFETY
(Continued)
Adjustable Anchorage
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature
allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted
in the upward position without pushing or
squeezing the release button. To verify the
shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward
on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked
into position.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of
an accident is reduced for the mother and the
unborn child if they are wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the
abdomen and across the strong bones of the hips.
Place the shoulder belt across the chest and away
from the neck. Never place the shoulder belt
behind the back or under the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with
pretensioning devices that are designed to remove
slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.
These devices may improve the performance of the
seat belt by removing slack from the seat belt early
in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size
occupants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still
must be worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the
pretensioners are single use items. A deployed
pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be
replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with an Energy Management feature that may help
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a
collision. The seat belt system has a retractor
assembly that is designed to release webbing in a
controlled manner.
WARNING!
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could
even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these
instructions to wear your seat belt safely and
to keep your passengers safe, too.
Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder
and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it
is comfortable and not resting on your neck.
The retractor will withdraw any slack in the
shoulder belt.
Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce
the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
Always make all seat belt height adjustments
when the vehicle is stationary.
WARNING!
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 142
SAFETY 143
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR)
Vehicle Without Rear Seat
The seat belt in the passenger seating position is
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) which is used to secure a child
restraint system Ú page 162.
The figure below illustrates the locking feature for
each seating position.
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Location —
Vehicle Without Rear Seat
Vehicle With Rear Seat
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions
are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) which is used to secure a child
restraint system Ú page 162.
The figure below illustrates the locking feature for
each seating position.
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations —
Vehicle With Rear Seat
If the passenger seating position is equipped with
an ALR and is being used for normal usage, only
pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR
is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the
seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract
completely in this case and then carefully pull out
only the amount of webbing necessary to
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle
until you hear a "click."
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still
retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt.
Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child
restraint is installed in a seating position that has
a seat belt with this feature. Children 12 years old
and under should always be properly restrained in
the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
2. Grab the shoulder portion and pull downward
until the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This
indicates the seat belt is now in the Automatic
Locking Mode.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
6
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 143
144 SAFETY
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and
allow it to retract completely to disengage the
Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle
sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
(SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on others. If
you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a
collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting
wiring associated with the electrical Air Bag System
Components. Your vehicle may be equipped with the
following Air Bag System Components:
Air Bag System Components
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Air Bag Warning Light
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the air bag system whenever the
ignition switch is in the AVV/START or
MAR/ACC/ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch
is in the STOP/OFF/LOCK position the air bag
system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system
that may deploy the air bag system even if the
battery loses power or it becomes disconnected
prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight
seconds for a self-check when the ignition switch is
in the MAR/ACC/ON/RUN position. After the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If
the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the
system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either
momentarily or continuously. A single chime will
sound to alert you if the light comes on again after
initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will
illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning
Light if a malfunction is detected that could affect
the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the
nature of the malfunction. While the air bag system
is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the
following occurs, have an authorized dealer
service the air bag system immediately.
The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on
during the four to eight seconds when the igni-
tion switch is first in the MAR/ACC/ON/RUN
position.
The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the
four to eight-second interval.
The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermit-
tently or remains on while driving.
WARNING!
The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
feature or any other seat belt function is not
working properly when checked according to
the procedures in the Service Manual.
Failure to replace the seat belt assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to
restrain occupants who are wearing the seat
belt or children who are using booster seats.
The locked mode is only used to install
rear-facing or forward-facing child restraints
that have a harness for restraining the child.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 144
SAFETY 145
(Continued)
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In
this condition the air bags may not be ready to
inflate for your protection. Have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder
belts for both the driver and front passenger. The
front air bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint systems. The driver front air bag is
mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger front air bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment.
The words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are
embossed on the air bag covers.
Front Air Bag/Knee Impact Bolster Locations
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag
Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system
provides output appropriate to the severity and
type of collision as determined by the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive
information from the front impact sensors (if
equipped) or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately
during an impact that requires air bag deployment.
A low energy output is used in less severe
collisions. A higher energy output is used for more
severe collisions.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your
instrument panel could mean you won’t have the
air bag system to protect you in a collision. If the
light does not come on as a bulb check when the
ignition is first turned on, stays on after you start
the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have
an authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental
Driver Knee Air Bag
3 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
WARNING!
Being too close to the steering wheel or instru-
ment panel during front air bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfort-
ably extending your arms to reach the steering
wheel or instrument panel.
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
WARNING!
6
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 145
146 SAFETY
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or
front passenger seat belt buckle switch that
detects whether the driver or front passenger seat
belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch may
adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air
Bags.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional
protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front
air bags are not expected to reduce the risk of
injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The front
air bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions,
including some that may produce substantial
vehicle damage — for example, some pole
collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset
collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and
location of impact, front air bags may deploy in
crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but
that produce a severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle
deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage
by themselves are not good indicators of whether
or not an air bag should have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all
collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in
position, away from an inflating air bag.
When the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
detects a collision requiring the front air bags, it
signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air
bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper
passenger side of the instrument panel separate
and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to
their full size. The front air bags fully inflate in less
time than it takes to blink your eyes. The front air
bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain
the driver and front passenger.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees
of the driver and front passenger, and position the
front occupants for improved interaction with the
front air bags.
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental
Driver Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument
panel below the steering column. The
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag provides
enhanced protection during a frontal impact by
working together with the seat belts,
pretensioners, and front air bags.
WARNING!
No objects should be placed over or near the
air bag on the instrument panel or steering
wheel because any such objects could cause
harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe
enough to cause the air bag to inflate.
Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You
may damage the air bags and you could be
injured because the air bags may no longer be
functional. The protective covers for the air
bag cushions are designed to open only when
the air bags are inflating.
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, air bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even
though you have air bags.
WARNING!
Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee
impact bolsters in any way.
Do not mount any accessories to the knee
impact bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos,
citizen band radios, etc.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 146
SAFETY 147
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
are located in the outboard side of the front seats.
The SABs are marked with “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG” on a label or on the seat trim on the
outboard side of the seats.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant
injury during certain side impacts, in addition to
the injury reduction potential provided by the seat
belts and body structure.
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the
outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover. The
inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam into
the space between the occupant and the door. The
SAB moves at a very high speed and with such a
high force that it could injure occupants if they are
not seated properly, or if items are positioned in
the area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side
Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs) are located above the side windows. The
trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG”
or “AIRBAG.”
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other
injuries to front and rear seat outboard occupants
in certain side impacts, in addition to the injury
reduction potential provided by the seat belts and
body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side
windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside
edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the
window. The SABICs inflate with enough force to
injure occupants if they are not belted and seated
properly, or if items are positioned in the area
where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even
greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through
side windows in certain side impact events.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place
objects between you and the Side Air Bags; the
performance could be adversely affected and/or
objects could be pushed into you, causing
serious injury.
6
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 147
148 SAFETY
(Continued)
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in
certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) determines whether the
deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular
impact event is appropriate, based on the severity
and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid
the ORC in determining the appropriate response
to impact events. The system is calibrated to
deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of the
vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag
occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air
Bags deploy independently; a left side impact
deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right-side
impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether
or not Side Air Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side
collisions, including some collisions at certain
angles, or some side collisions that do not impact
the area of the passenger compartment. The Side
Air Bags may deploy during angled or offset frontal
collisions where the front air bags deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time
than it takes to blink your eyes.
WARNING!
Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or
other cargo up high enough to block the
deployment of the SABICs. The trim covering
above the side windows where the SABIC and
its deployment path are located should
remain free from any obstructions.
In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do
not install any accessory items in your vehicle
which could alter the roof. Do not add an after-
market sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add
roof racks that require permanent attach-
ments (bolts or screws) for installation on the
vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
WARNING!
Occupants, including children, who are up
against or very close to Side Air Bags can be
seriously injured or killed. Occupants,
including children, should never lean on or
sleep against the door, side windows, or area
where the side air bags inflate, even if they are
in an infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where appro-
priate) are necessary for your protection in all
collisions. They also help keep you in position,
away from an inflating Side Air Bag. To get the
best protection from the Side Air Bags, occu-
pants must wear their seat belts properly and
sit upright with their backs against the seats.
Children must be properly restrained in a child
restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for
the size of the child.
WARNING!
Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
Being too close to the Side Air Bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely
injured or killed.
Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead
to more severe injuries in a collision. The Side
Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain
you properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags
won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt
even though you have Side Air Bags.
WARNING!
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 148
SAFETY 149
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are
designed to activate in certain rollover events. The
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
whether deployment in a particular rollover event
is appropriate, based on the severity and type of
collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good
indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags and seat
belt pretensioners should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners will
not deploy in all rollover events. The rollover
sensing system determines if a rollover event may
be in progress and whether deployment is
appropriate. In the event the vehicle experiences a
rollover or near rollover event, and deployment is
appropriate, the rollover sensing system will deploy
the side air bags and seat belt pretensioners on
both sides of the vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through
side windows in certain rollover or side impact
events.
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors
the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring
associated with electrical Air Bag System Compo-
nents listed below:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all colli-
sions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air
bags, any or all of the following may occur:
The air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occu-
pants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or
those you might get sliding along a carpet or
gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
contact with chemicals. They are not perma-
nent and normally heal quickly. However, if you
haven’t healed significantly within a few days,
or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
As the air bags deflate, you may see some
smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal
by-product of the process that generates the
non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation. These
airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes,
nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles
settle on your clothing, follow the garment
manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have
deployed. If you are involved in another collision,
the air bags will not be in place to protect you.
6
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 149
150 SAFETY
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deploy-
ment.
After any collision, the vehicle should be taken
to an authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication
network remains intact, and the power remains
intact, depending on the nature of the event, the
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) will determine
whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response
System perform the following functions:
Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped)
Cut off battery power to the electric motor
(if equipped)
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has
power
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as
long as the battery has power or for 15 minutes
from the intervention of the Enhanced Accident
Response System
Unlock the power door locks
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any
of these other functions in response to the
Enhanced Accident Response System:
Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC
Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door
Cut off battery power to the:
Engine
Electric Motor (if equipped)
Electric Power Steering
Brake booster
Electric park brake
Automatic transmission gear selector
Horn
Front wiper
Headlamp washer pump (if equipped)
NOTE:
After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition to
the STOP/OFF position and remove the key from
the ignition switch to avoid draining the battery.
Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the
engine compartment and on the ground near the
engine compartment and fuel tank before
resetting the system and starting the engine. If
there are no fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle
electrical devices (e.g. headlights) after an
accident, reset the system by following the
procedure described below. If you have any doubt,
contact an authorized dealer.
Enhanced Accident Response System
Reset Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response
System functions after an event, the ignition switch
must be changed from ignition AVV/START or
MAR/RUN to ignition STOP/OFF. Carefully check
the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the engine
compartment and fuel tank before resetting the
system and starting the engine. After an accident,
if the vehicle will not start after performing the
reset procedure, the vehicle must be towed to an
authorized dealer to be inspected and to have the
Enhanced Accident Response System reset.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners
cannot protect you in another collision. Have the
air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the seat
belt retractor assemblies replaced by an
authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the
Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced
as well.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 150
SAFETY 151
Maintaining Your Air Bag System Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting
a road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed.
The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The
EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data
as:
How various systems in your vehicle were oper-
ating;
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
belts were buckled/fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
This data can help provide a better understanding
of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries
occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are
recorded by the EDR under normal driving condi-
tions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender,
age, and crash location) are recorded. However,
other parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the EDR data with the type of personally
identifying data routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or
the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle
manufacturer, other parties, such as law
enforcement, that have the special equipment,
can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
WARNING!
Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You
could be injured if the air bag system is not
there to protect you. Do not modify the compo-
nents or wiring, including adding any kind of
badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub
trim cover or the upper passenger side of the
instrument panel. Do not modify the front
fascia/bumper, vehicle body structure, or add
aftermarket side steps or running boards.
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
Do not attempt to modify any part of your air
bag system. The air bag may inflate accidentally
or may not function properly if modifications are
made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer
for any air bag system service. If your seat,
including your trim cover and cushion, needs to
be serviced in any way (including removal or
loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts),
take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. Only
manufacturer approved seat accessories may
be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag
system for persons with disabilities, contact an
authorized dealer.
6
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 151
152 SAFETY
CHILD RESTRAINTS
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at
all times, including babies and children. Every
state in the United States, and every Canadian
province, requires that small children ride in
proper restraint systems. This is the law, and you
can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to
crash statistics, children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost
large enough for an adult safety belt. Always check
the child seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you
have the correct seat for your child. Carefully read
and follow all the instructions and warnings in the
child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all the
labels attached to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that
it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable
Safety Standards. You should also make sure that
you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
For additional information, refer to http://
www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers
or
call: 1–888–327–4236
Canadian residents should refer to Transport
Canada’s website for additional information:
https://www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road/
child-car-seat-safety.html
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become
a projectile inside the vehicle. The force required
to hold even an infant on your lap could become
so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured or killed. Any child riding
in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for
the child’s size.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 152
SAFETY 153
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers
Children who are two years old or younger and who
have not reached the height or weight limits of their
child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child
Restraint, facing rearward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Small Children
Children who are at least two years old or who have
outgrown the height or weight limit of their
rear-facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point
Harness, facing forward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing
child restraint, but are too small to properly fit the
vehicle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat
belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who have
outgrown the height or weight limit of their booster
seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the
vehicle
6
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 153
154 SAFETY
(Continued)
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years
old or until they reach either the height or weight
limit of their rear-facing child restraint. Two types of
child restraints can be used rear-facing: infant
carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth
until they reach the weight or height limit of the
infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be used
either rear-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle.
Convertible child seats often have a higher weight
limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers
do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who
have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less
than at least two years old. Children should remain
rear-facing until they reach the highest weight or
height allowed by their convertible child seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have
outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat
can ride forward-facing in the vehicle.
Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for
children who are over two years old or who have
outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children
should remain in a forward-facing child seat with a
harness for as long as possible, up to the highest
weight or height allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s
seat belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with
knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while
the child’s back is against the seatback, they
should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The
child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in
the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
WARNING!
Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in
a collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufac-
turer’s directions exactly when installing an
infant or child restraint.
After a child restraint is installed in the
vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat forward
or rearward because it can loosen the child
restraint attachments. Remove the child
restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat
position. When the vehicle seat has been
adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 154
SAFETY 155
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the
shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are long
enough to bend over the front of the seat when
their back is against the seatback, should use the
seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step test
to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s
seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the
back of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over
the front of the vehicle seat while the child is
still sitting all the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s
shoulder between the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible,
touching the child’s thighs and not the
stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole
trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,”
then the child still needs to use a booster seat in
this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder
belt, check seat belt fit periodically and make sure
the seat belt buckle is latched. A child’s squirming
or slouching can move the belt out of position. If
the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move
the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use
a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
correctly.
When your child restraint is not in use, secure
it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH
anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do
not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden
stop or accident, it could strike the occupants
or seatbacks and cause serious personal
injury.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt
under an arm or behind their back. In a crash,
the shoulder belt will not protect a child properly,
which may result in serious injury or death. A
child must always wear both the lap and
shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
6
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 155
156 SAFETY
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints — Vehicles Equipped With Rear Seating
For instructions on installing child restraints in commercial vehicles without rear seating, see Ú page 165.
Restraint Type
Combined Weight of
the Child + Child
Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower
Anchors Only
Seat Belt Only
LATCH – Lower
Anchors + Top Tether
Anchor
Seat Belt + Top Tether
Anchor
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X X
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 156
SAFETY 157
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint
anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for
Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The
LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for
installing LATCH-equipped child seats. There are
two lower anchorages located at the back of the
seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one
top tether anchorage located behind the seating
position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the
vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions may
have a top tether anchorage but no lower
anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat
belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to
install the child restraint. Please see the following
table for more information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle — Vehicles
Equipped With Rear Seating
Lower Anchor / Top Tether Locations —
Vehicle With Rear Seat
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per
Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
6
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 157
158 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of
the child restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage
system to attach the child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the
combined weight of the child and the child restraint
is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether
anchor instead of the LATCH system once the
combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be
used together to attach a rear-facing or
forward-facing child restraint?
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH
anchorage system to attach a rear-facing or
forward-facing child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH
anchorages if allowed by the booster seat
manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s
manual for more information.
Can a child seat be installed in the center position
using the inner LATCH lower anchorages from the
outboard seating positions?
No
Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a
child seat in the center seating position.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 158
SAFETY 159
Can two child restraints be attached using a
common lower LATCH anchorage?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more
child restraints. If the center position does not have
dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat
belt to install a child seat in the center position
next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in
an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of
the front passenger seat?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front
passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer
also allows contact. See your child restraint
owner’s manual for more information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes
The 2nd row head restraints can be removed in
every seating position if they interfere with the
installation of the child restraint Ú page 19.
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
6
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 159
160 SAFETY
Locating The LATCH Anchorages —
Vehicles Equipped With Rear Seating
The lower anchorages are round bars
that are found at the rear of the seat
cushion where it meets the seatback,
below the anchorage symbols on the
seatback. They are just visible when you lean into
the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will
easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap
between the seatback and seat cushion.
LATCH Anchorages
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages —
Vehicles Equipped With Rear Seating
There are tether strap anchorages
behind each rear seating position
located on the back of the seat.
Tether Anchorage Locations
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each
side. Each will have a hook or connector to attach
to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the
connection to the anchorage. Forward-facing child
restraints and some rear-facing child restraints will
also be equipped with a tether strap. The tether
strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the
top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
Always follow the directions of the child restraint
manufacturer when installing your child restraint.
Not all child restraint systems will be installed as
described here.
WARNING!
Do not install a child restraint in the center
position using the LATCH system. This position
is not approved for installing child seats using
the LATCH attachments. You must use the
seat belt and tether anchor to install a child
seat in the center seating position.
Never use the same lower anchorage to
attach more than one child restraint. See
Ú page 161 for typical installation instruc-
tions.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 160
SAFETY 161
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow
the seat belt, following the instructions below. See
Ú page 162 to check what type of seat belt each
seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and
on the tether strap of the child seat so that
you can more easily attach the hooks or
connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower
anchorages for that seating position. If the
second row seat can be reclined, you may
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint
(if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat
can be moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the child
seat. You may also move the front seat forward
to allow more room for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the
child restraint to the lower anchorages in the
selected seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect
it to the top tether anchorage. See
Ú page 164 for directions to attach a tether
anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child
restraint rearward and downward into the
seat. Remove slack in the straps according to
the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly
by pulling back and forth on the child seat at
the belt path. It should not move more than
1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
(ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install
a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not
being used by other occupants or being used to
secure child restraints. An unused belt could injure
a child if they play with it and accidentally lock the
seat belt retractor. Before installing a child
restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat
belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the
child restraint installation, instead of buckling it
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt
through the child restraint belt path and then
buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all
children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not
toys and that they should not play with them.
6
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 161
162 SAFETY
Installing Child Restraints Using The
Vehicle Seat Belt In Vehicles With Rear
Seating
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured
in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion
of a lap/shoulder belt.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions
are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap
portion of the seat belt tight around the child
restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking
clip. The ALR retractor can be “switched” into a
locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the
retractor and then letting the webbing retract back
into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make
a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor Ú page 143.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations —
Vehicle With Rear Seating
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the
restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufac-
turer’s directions exactly when installing an
infant or child restraint.
Child restraint anchorages are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no
circumstances are they to be used for adult
seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other
items or equipment to the vehicle.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure of
the restraint. The child could be badly injured
or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 162
SAFETY 163
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of
the child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with
the seat belt to attach a forward facing child
restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using the seat
belt to install a forward facing child restraint, up to
the recommended weight limit of the child
restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of
the front passenger seat?
Yes
Contact between the front passenger seat and the
child restraint is allowed, if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes
The 2nd row head restraints can be removed in
every seating position if they interfere with the
installation of the child restraint
Ú page 19.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat
belt against the belt path of the child restraint?
No
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position
with an ALR retractor.
6
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 163
164 SAFETY
Installing A Child Restraint With A
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) — Vehicles Equipped With Rear
Seating:
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured
in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion
of a lap/shoulder belt.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the
seating position. If the second row seat can
be reclined, you may recline the seat and/or
raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to get a
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may
wish to move it to its rear-most position to
make room for the child seat. You may also
move the front seat forward to allow more
room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the
child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in
the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
hear a “click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion
tight against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder
part of the belt until you have pulled all the
seat belt webbing out of the retractor. Then,
allow the webbing to retract back into the
retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will hear
a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it
is locked, you should not be able to pull out any
webbing. If the retractor is not
locked, repeat
step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to
tighten the lap portion around the child
restraint while you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and
the seating position has a top tether
anchorage, connect the tether strap to the
anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See
Ú page 164 for directions to attach a tether
anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly
by pulling back and forth on the child seat at
the belt path. It should not move more than
1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check
the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
Tether Anchorage
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure of
the restraint. The child could be badly injured
or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car
seat to any location in front of the car seat,
including the seat frame or a tether anchorage.
Only attach the tether strap of a rear-facing car
seat to the tether anchorage that is approved for
that seating position, located behind the top of
the vehicle seat. See Ú page 157 for the
location of approved tether anchorages in your
vehicle.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 164
SAFETY 165
1. Look behind the seating position where you
plan to install the child restraint to find the
tether anchorage. If the seat can be moved,
you may need to move the seat forward to
provide better access to the tether
anchorage. If there is no top tether anchorage
for that seating position, move the child
restraint to another position in the vehicle if
one is available.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most
direct path for the strap between the anchor
and the child seat. If your vehicle is equipped
with adjustable rear head restraints, raise the
head restraint, and where possible, route the
tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower
the head restraint and pass the tether strap
around the outboard side of the head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child
restraint to the top tether anchorage as shown
in the diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to
the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Tether Strap Mounting
Installing Child Restraints In Commercial
Vehicles — Vehicles Not Equipped With
Rear Seating
This commercial vehicle is not designed for use as
a family vehicle and is not intended for carrying
children in the front passenger seat(s). Never
install rear-facing child restraints in this vehicle. If
you must carry a child in a forward-facing child
restraint, the passenger seat should be moved to
the full rearward position and the child must be in
a proper restraint system based on its age, size
and weight. Follow the instructions below to secure
the child restraint using the seat belt and tether
anchorage.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could
lead to increased head motion and possible
injury to the child. Use only the anchorage
position directly behind the child seat to
secure a child restraint top tether strap.
If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear
seat, make sure the tether strap does not slip
into the opening between the seatbacks as
you remove slack in the strap.
WARNING!
Rear-facing infant restraints must never be
secured in the passenger seat of a vehicle with a
passenger air bag. In a collision, a passenger air
bag may deploy causing severe injury or death to
infants riding in rear-facing infant restraints.
6
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 165
166 SAFETY
Installing Child Restraints Using The
Vehicle Seat Belt In Vehicles Without Rear
Seating
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured
in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion
of a lap/shoulder belt.
The seat belt in the passenger seating position is
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR). This seat belt is designed to keep
the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the
child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a
locking clip. The ALR retractor can be “switched”
into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out
of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the
ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is
pulled back into the retractor Ú page 143.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
Child Restraints (Commercial Vehicle)
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations For Front
Bucket Seats
Installing A Child Restraint With A
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) — Vehicles Not Equipped With Rear
Seating:
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured
in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion
of a lap/shoulder belt.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the
seating position.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the
child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in
the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
hear a “click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion
tight against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder
part of the belt until you have pulled all the
seat belt webbing out of the retractor. Then,
allow the webbing to retract back into the
retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will hear
a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure of
the restraint. The child could be badly injured
or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure of
the restraint. The child could be badly injured
or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 166
SAFETY 167
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it
is locked, you should not be able to pull out any
webbing. If the retractor is
not locked, repeat
step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to
tighten the lap portion around the child
restraint while you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and
the seating position has a top tether
anchorage, connect the tether strap to the
anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See
Ú page 167 for directions to attach a tether
anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly
by pulling back and forth on the child seat at
the belt path. It should not move more than
1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check
the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
Tether Anchorage (Commercial Vehicle)
This vehicle is equipped with a tether strap
anchorage located behind the front passenger
seatback, near the floor. When installing a
forward-facing child restraint, always secure the
top tether strap to the tether anchorage.
1. Look behind the front passenger seat to find
the tether anchorage. You may need to move
the seat forward to provide better access to
the tether anchorage.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most
direct path for the strap between the anchor
and the child seat. If your vehicle is equipped
with adjustable head restraints, raise the head
restraint, and where possible, route the tether
strap under the head restraint and between
the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around the
outboard side of the head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child
restraint to the top tether anchorage as shown
in the diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to
the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Tether Strap Installation
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead
to increased head motion and possible injury to
the child. Use only the anchorage position
directly behind the child seat to secure a child
restraint top tether strap.
6
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 167
168 SAFETY
SAFETY TIPS
TRANSPORTING PASSENGERS
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
TRANSPORTING PETS
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm
your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about
and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during
panic braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if
equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are
secured by seat belts.
SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD MAKE
I
NSIDE THE VEHICLE
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking
for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts
must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system.
If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if you
have questions regarding the seat belt or retractor
conditions, take your vehicle to an authorized FCA
dealer or authorized FCA Certified Collision Care
Program facility for inspection.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on for
four to eight seconds as a bulb check
when the ignition switch is first placed in
the on ON/RUN position. If the light is
either not on during starting, stays on, or turns on
while driving, have the system inspected at an
authorized dealer as soon as possible. After the
bulb check, this light will illuminate with a single
chime when a fault with the Air Bag System has
been detected. It will stay on until the fault is
removed. If the light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving, have an authorized
dealer service the vehicle immediately
Ú page 137.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and
place the blower control on high speed. You should
be able to feel the air directed against the
windshield. See an authorized dealer for service if
your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
Only use a floor mat that does not interfere with the
operation of the accelerator, brake or clutch
pedals. Only use a floor mat that is securely
attached using the floor mat fasteners so it cannot
slip out of position and interfere with the
accelerator, brake or clutch pedals or impair safe
operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup
may cause serious injury or death.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a colli-
sion, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 168
SAFETY 169
(Continued)
(Continued)
PERIODIC SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD
M
AKE OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven
wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or
other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall.
Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect
sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges. Check the
lug nut/bold torque for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or
stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat
fasteners may cause your floor mat to interfere
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and
cause a loss of vehicle control. To prevent
SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
ALWAYS securely attach your floor
mat using the floor mat fasteners. DO
NOT install your floor mat upside down
or turn your floor mat over. Lightly pull
to confirm mat is secured using the floor mat
fasteners on a regular basis.
ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING
FLOOR MAT FROM THE VEHICLE
before installing any other floor mat.
NEVER install or stack an additional
floor mat on top of an existing floor mat.
ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that cannot
be properly attached and secured to your
vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be replaced,
only use a FCA approved floor mat for the
specific make, model, and year of your
vehicle.
ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the
driver’s side floor area. To check for interfer-
ence, with the vehicle properly parked with the
engine off, fully depress the accelerator, the
brake, and the clutch pedal (if present) to
check for interference. If your floor mat inter-
feres with the operation of any pedal, or is not
secure to the floor, remove the floor mat from
the vehicle and place the floor mat in your
trunk.
ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on
the passenger’s side floor area.
ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide
into the driver’s side floor area when the
vehicle is moving. Objects can become
trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle
control.
NEVER place any objects under the floor mat
(e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects could
change the position of the floor mat and may
cause interference with the accelerator,
brake, or clutch pedals.
WARNING!
If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
re-installed, always properly attach carpet to
the floor and check the floor mat fasteners are
secure to the vehicle carpet. Fully depress
each pedal to check for interference with the
accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals then
re-install the floor mats.
It is recommended to only use mild soap and
water to clean your floor mats. After cleaning,
always check your floor mat has been properly
installed and is secured to your vehicle using
the floor mat fasteners by lightly pulling mat.
WARNING!
6
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 169
170 SAFETY
(Continued)
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake
lights and exterior lights while you work the
controls. Check turn signal and high beam
indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under the vehicle after overnight
parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks.
Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should
be located and corrected immediately.
EXHAUST GAS
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry
into the vehicle body is a properly maintained
engine exhaust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the
exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be
detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside
or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have an
authorized dealer inspect the complete exhaust
system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts.
Open seams or loose connections could permit
exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger
compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust
system each time the vehicle is raised for
lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
CARBON MONOXIDE WARNINGS
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you
unconscious and can eventually poison you. To
avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to
move your vehicle in or out of the area.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/lift-
gate/rear doors open, make sure that all
windows are closed and the climate control
BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT
use the recirculation mode.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with
the engine running, adjust your heating or
cooling controls to force outside air into the
vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is
deadly. Follow the precautions below to prevent
carbon monoxide poisoning:
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain
carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless
gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in a
closed area, such as a garage, and never sit in
a parked vehicle with the engine running for
an extended period. If the vehicle is stopped in
an open area with the engine running for more
than a short period, adjust the ventilation
system to force fresh, outside air into the
vehicle.
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system
inspected every time the vehicle is raised.
Have any abnormal conditions repaired
promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
windows fully open.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 170
171
(Continued)
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning Flashers button is located on
the instrument panel below the radio screen.
Hazard Warning Flashers Button
Push the button to turn on the Hazard Warning
Flashers. When the button is activated, all
directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn
oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push the button
a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning
Flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should
not be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it
when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a
safety hazard for other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek
assistance, the Hazard Warning Flashers will
continue to operate even though the ignition is
placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
With extended use, the Hazard Warning Flashers
may wear down your battery.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
PREPARATIONS FOR JACKING
1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as far
from the edge of the roadway as possible.
Avoid icy or slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough
off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous.
The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on
you. You could be crushed. Never put any part
of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to
a service center where it can be raised on a lift.
Never start or run the engine while the vehicle
is on a jack.
The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be
used to lift the vehicle for service purposes.
The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level
surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
WARNING!
7
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 171
172 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK (P).
5. Turn the ignition to the STOP (OFF/LOCK)
position.
6. Chock both the front and rear of the wheel
diagonally opposite the jacking position. For
example, if the right driver’s wheel is being
changed, block the passenger’s rear wheel.
Wheel Blocked
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when
the vehicle is being lifted or raised.
JACK LOCATION — IF EQUIPPED
The jack bag is placed on the front passenger floor
or in the rear cargo area depending on the trim
level.
Jack/Tools Location
REMOVING THE SPARE TIRE —
I
F EQUIPPED
1. Remove the spare tire before attempting to
jack up the vehicle. The spare tire is located
at the rear of the vehicle, under the cargo
floor. Attach the wrench handle to the winch
extension.
Jack Tools
2. To access the winch mechanism, open the
rear doors of the vehicle to expose the winch
mechanism access hole. Install the wrench
handle and winch extension into the winch
mechanism hole.
1 — Wrench Handle
2 — Winch Extension
3 — Emergency Screwdriver
4 — Bolt Install Wrench
5 — Wheel Chock
6 — Jack
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 172
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 173
Winch Access Hole Location
Jack Tools
Installing Wrench Handle
3. Rotate the wheel wrench handle counter-
clockwise until the spare tire is on the ground
with enough cable slack to allow you to pull it
out from under the vehicle.
NOTE:
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
winch extension only. Use of an air wrench or other
power tools is not recommended and can damage
the winch.
Lowering The Spare Tire
4. Pull the spare tire out from under the vehicle to
gain access to the spare tire retainer.
Spare Tire
1 — Wrench Handle
2 — Winch Extension
7
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 173
174 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
5. Remove the wing nut prior to removing the
retainer from the wheel.
Wing Nut
6. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give
clearance to tilt the retainer at the end of the
cable.
Lifting Spare Tire
7. Pull the retainer through the center of the
wheel.
Retainer
JACKING INSTRUCTIONS
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before
raising the vehicle.
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
Apply the parking brake firmly and set an auto-
matic transmission in PARK; a manual trans-
mission in REVERSE.
Chock the wheel diagonally opposite the
wheel to be raised.
Never start or run the engine with the vehicle
on a jack.
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is
on a jack.
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a
jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle,
take it to a service center where it can be
raised on a lift.
Only use the jack in the positions indicated
and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
To ensure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with
the valve stem facing the ground.
The stowed spare tire should always be
checked for security by pushing on it with your
hand, at the location under the rear fascia/
bumper, behind the vehicle. The spare tire
should not move when fully secured by the
winch under the vehicle.
WARNING!
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 174
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 175
Jack Warning Label
Placement for the front and rear jacking locations
are critical. See below images for proper jacking
locations.
Jacking Locations
1. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug
bolts with the wrench handle by turning them
to the left one turn while the wheel is still on
the ground.
2. There are two jack engagement locations on
each side of the vehicle body.
NOTE:
Place the jack underneath the jack engagement
location that is closest to the flat tire.
Front Lifting Point
Front Jacking Location
Rear Lifting Point
7
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 175
176 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Rear Jacking Location
3. Turn the handle on the jack screw to the right
until the jack head is properly engaged in the
described location.
Do not raise the vehicle
until you are sure the jack is securely engaged.
4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to
the right until the tire just clears the surface
and enough clearance is obtained to install the
spare tire. Minimum tire lift provides maximum
stability.
5. Remove the wheel lug bolts. For vehicles with
wheel covers, remove the cover from the
wheel by hand. Do not pry the wheel cover off.
Then pull the wheel off the hub.
6. Install the spare tire. Lightly tighten the wheel
lug bolts using the bolt install wrench.
Mounting Spare Tire
Installing Spare Tire
WARNING!
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous.
The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on
you. You could be crushed. Never get any part of
your body under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you
need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can
make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the
jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle
only enough to remove the tire.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not fully tighten the wheel bolts until the
vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve
stem facing outward. The vehicle could be
damaged if the spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 176
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 177
7. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to
the left Ú page 236.
8. Lower the jack to its fully-closed position.
9. Stow the cable and wheel spacer before
driving the vehicle Ú page 177.
10. Stow the jack and tools under the driver’s seat.
11. Check the spare tire pressure as soon as
possible. Correct the tire pressure, as
required.
12. When you place the spare tire back on the
winch or if you carry the tire in need of repair
on the winch, always check that the tire is
properly secured under the vehicle by pushing
on the stowed tire under the rear fascia/
bumper at the back of the vehicle. If the tire
has motion when pushed, use the tools to
re-tighten the winch until a loud click is heard.
VEHICLES WITH ALLOY WHEELS
For stowing a damaged tire on vehicles with alloy
wheels, remove the adapter bracket and bolts
from the storage bag in the glove compartment
and follow the steps below:
1. Take the adapter and fit the plastic spacer
between the spring and the flange of the
bracket (The adapter bracket is sold
separately through the dealer).
Adapter/Spacer
2. The plastic fin must be directed downwards
and perfectly coincide with the flange cut part;
fit the bracket in the adapter, fold the bracket
up and secure it to the adapter with the
fastening knob.
Adapter/Bracket
3. Position the tire vertically and lay the mounted
adapter on the inner part of the rim, using the
supplied bolts fasten the wheel to the adapter
using the bolt install wrench.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could endanger the occupants of
the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the
spare tire in the places provided. Have the
deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced
immediately.
1 — Adapter
2 — Plastic Spacer
1 — Adapter
2 — Fastening Knob
7
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 177
178 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Alloy Wheel Mounting
4. Tighten the bolts with the wrench handle.
5. Rotate the winch mechanism clockwise until
the wheel is properly stowed under the vehicle
and until the wench makes three audible
noises.
6. Reach underneath and shake tire by hand to
confirm that it is secure. The tire should not
move. If the tire is still loose and/or three
audible noises are not heard, place and secure
damaged wheel into the vehicle and seek
dealer assistance for the winch mechanism.
VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH WHEEL
C
OVERS
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. To ease the installation process for steel
wheels with wheel covers, install two wheel
bolts on the wheel. Install the wheel bolts with
the threaded end of the bolt toward the wheel.
Lightly tighten the wheel bolts.
Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap
3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with
the valve stem on the wheel. Install the cover
by hand, snapping the cover over the two
wheel bolts. Do not use a hammer or excessive
force to install the cover.
4. Install the remaining wheel bolts with the
threaded end of the wheel bolt toward the
wheel. Lightly tighten the wheel bolts.
5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the
jack handle counterclockwise.
6. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down
on the wrench while holding at the end of the
handle for increased leverage. Tighten the
wheel bolts in a star pattern until each wheel
bolt has been tightened twice Ú page 236.
7. After 25 miles (40 km) check the wheel bolt
torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all
wheel bolts are properly seated against the
wheel.
1 — Valve Stem
2 — Valve Notch
3 — Road Tire
4 — Wheel Cover
5 — Wheel Lug Nut
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not fully tighten the wheel bolts until the
vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 178
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 179
(Continued)
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Small punctures up to ¼ inch (6 mm) in the tire
tread can be sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign
objects (e.g., screws or nails) should not be
removed from the tire. Tire Service Kit can be used
in outside temperatures down to approximately
-4°F (-20°C).
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing
you to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km)
with a maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
TIRE SERVICE KIT STORAGE
The Tire Service Kit is located under the passenger
seat.
Tire Service Kit Storage
TIRE SERVICE KIT USAGE
If a tire is punctured, you can make a first
emergency repair using the Tire Service Kit located
under the passenger seat.
Tire punctures of up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) can be
repaired; the kit can be used in all weather
conditions. Do not remove the foreign object from
the punctured tire, i.e., screw or nail.
Remove the Tire Service Kit from the vehicle, take it
out from the bag and place it near the punctured tire.
Screw the clear flexible filling tube to the tire valve.
Tire Service Kit Components
1 — Power Button
2 — Pressure Gauge
3 — Sealant Bottle
4 — Sealant Hose (Clear)
5 — Air Pump Hose (Black)
WARNING!
Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
using the Tire Service Kit.
Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle
under the following circumstances:
If the puncture in the tire tread is approxi-
mately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
If the tire has any sidewall damage.
If the tire has any damage from driving
with extremely low tire pressure.
If the tire has any damage from driving on
a flat tire.
If the wheel has any damage.
If you are unsure of the condition of the
tire or the wheel.
Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames
or heat source.
7
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 179
180 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Insert the power plug into the vehicle power outlet
socket. Start the vehicle engine.
Push the Tire Service Kit power button on. The
electric compressor will be turned on, sealant and
air will inflate the tire.
Minimum 26 psi (1.8 bar) of pressure should be
reached within 20 minutes. If the pressure has not
been reached, turn off and remove the Tire Service
Kit, drive the vehicle 30 feet (10 meters) back and
forth, to better distribute the sealant inside the
tire.
Attach the clear flexible filling tube of the
compressor directly to the tire valve and repeat the
inflation process.
When the correct pressure has been reached,
start driving the vehicle to uniformly distribute the
sealant inside the tire. After 10 minutes, stop and
check the tire pressure. If the pressure is below
19 psi (1.3 bar), do not drive the vehicle, as the
tire is too damaged, contact the nearest
authorized dealer.
If the pressure is at 19 psi (1.3 bar) or above
repeat the inflation process to reach the correct
tire pressure and continue driving.
Peel off the warning label from the bottle and place
it on the dashboard as a reminder to the driver that
a tire has been treated with Tire Service Kit.
NOTE:
Replace the sealant canister prior to the expiration
date at an authorized dealer.
Tire Service Kit Sealant Canister
A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a colli-
sion or hard stop could endanger the occupants of
the vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in the
place provided. Failure to follow these warnings
can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to
you, your passengers, and others around you.
Take care not to allow the contents of Tire
Service Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes,
or clothing. Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful
if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed through the
skin. It causes skin, eye, and respiratory irrita-
tion. Flush immediately with plenty of water if
there is any contact with eyes or skin. Change
clothing as soon as possible, if there is any
contact with clothing.
Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains
latex. In case of an allergic reaction or rash,
consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire
Service Kit out of reach of children. If swal-
lowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty of
water and drink plenty of water. Do not induce
vomiting! Consult a physician immediately.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire
repair. Have the tire inspected and repaired or
replaced after using Tire Service Kit. Do not
exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) until the tire is
repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this
warning can result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around
you. Have the tire checked as soon as possible
at an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
The metal end fitting from Power Plug may get
hot after use, so it should be handled carefully.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 180
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 181
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be
jump started using a set of jumper cables and a
battery in another vehicle or by using a portable
battery booster pack. Jump starting can be
dangerous if done improperly, so please follow the
procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack, follow
the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
precautions.
PREPARATIONS FOR JUMP STARTING
The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of
the engine compartment, behind the left headlight
assembly.
Positive (+) Battery Post Location
NOTE:
The positive battery post is covered with a
protective cap. Press on tabs, then lift up on the
cap to gain access to the positive
(+) battery post.
Positive Battery Post Protective Cap
See below steps to prepare for jump starting:
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic
transmission into PARK (P) and turn the
ignition to STOP.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical
accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the
battery, park the vehicle within the jumper
cables reach, apply the parking brake and
make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Store the sealant canister in its special
compartment, away from sources of heat.
Failure to follow this WARNING may result in
sealant canister rupture and serious injury or
death.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is
frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause
personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or
any other booster source with a system voltage
greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery,
starter motor, alternator or electrical system may
occur.
7
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 181
182 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive
(+) end of the jumper
cable to the positive
(+)
post of the discharged
vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable to the positive
(+) post of the
booster battery.
3. Connect the negative
(-) end of the jumper
cable to the negative
(-) post of the booster
battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative
(-)
jumper cable to a good engine ground. A
“ground” is an exposed metallic/unpainted
part of the engine, frame or chassis, such as
an accessory bracket or large bolt. The ground
must be away from the battery and the fuel
injection system.
Jump Starting Label
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the
booster battery, let the engine idle a few
minutes, and then start the engine in the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
6. Once the engine is started, follow the discon-
necting procedure below.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and
personal injury could result.
WARNING!
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan
whenever the hood is raised. It can start
anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can be
injured by moving fan blades.
Remove any metal jewelry such as rings,
watch bands and bracelets that could make
an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be
seriously injured.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn
your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas
which is flammable and explosive. Keep open
flames or sparks away from the battery.
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure
could result in personal injury or property
damage due to battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster
vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the
negative
(-) post of the discharged battery. The
resulting electrical spark could cause the
battery to explode and could result in personal
injury.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 182
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 183
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative
(-)
end of the jumper
cable from the engine ground of the vehicle
with the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable from the negative
(-) post of the
booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive
(+) end of the jumper
cable from the positive
(+) post of the booster
battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive
(+)
jumper cable from the positive
(+) post of the
vehicle with the discharged battery, and
reinstall the protective cap.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your
vehicle you should have the battery and charging
system inspected at an authorized dealer.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
If the vehicle is overheating, it will need to be
serviced by an authorized dealer.
In any of the following situations, you can reduce
the potential for overheating by taking the
appropriate action.
On the highways — slow down.
In city traffic — while stopped, place the trans-
mission in NEUTRAL (N), but do not increase the
engine idle speed while preventing vehicle
motion with the brakes.
NOTE:
There are steps that you can take to slow down an
impending overheat condition:
If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The
A/C system adds heat to the engine cooling
system and turning the A/C off can help remove
this heat.
You can also turn the temperature control to
maximum heat, the mode control to floor and
the blower control to high. This allows the heater
core to act as a supplement to the radiator and
aids in removing heat from the engine cooling
system.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power
outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough without
engine operation, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator.
If you see or hear steam coming from under the
hood, do not open the hood until the radiator
has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling
system pressure cap when the radiator or
coolant bottle is hot.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
HOT (H), pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the
vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
the pointer drops back into the normal range. If
the pointer remains on HOT (H), and you hear
continuous chimes, turn the engine off
immediately and call for service.
7
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 183
184 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
IGNITION KEY REMOVAL OVERRIDE
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park
Interlock which requires the transmission to be in
PARK (P) before the ignition switch can be turned
to the STOP (key removal) position.
To remove the key manually, proceed as follows:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Remove the Allen Key located in the rear cargo
area, in the tool bag (if equipped) or on the left
side in the cargo box.
3. Unlock the steering column, pull the tilt/
telescoping control handle down.
4. Pull the steering wheel outward until it is in the
end of the travel position, then lock the
steering column in position, push the control
handle up until fully engaged.
5. Using the Allen Key, undo the lower steering
column cover screws, and remove the lower
cover.
Lower Steering Column Screw Locations
6. Pull the release tab downwards using one
hand and with the other one remove the key,
sliding it outwards.
Release Tab Location
7. Once the key is removed, reinstall the steering
column cover.
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the gear selector
cannot be moved out of the PARK (P) position, you
can use the following procedure to temporarily
move the gear selector:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, carefully
separate the gear selector boot from the
center console.
CAUTION!
It is advisable to contact an authorized dealer to
have the reinstall procedure carried out. If you
would like to proceed in performing the reinstall
procedure special attention must be paid to the
correct coupling of the clips. Otherwise damage
to the cover or noise might be heard due to
incorrect fastening of the lower cover.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 184
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 185
Gear Selector Boot Location
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake
pedal.
5. Locate the gear selector override hole (at the
right front corner of the gear selector
assembly).
Gear Selector Override Access Hole Location
6. Insert a small screwdriver or a similar tool into
the gear selector override access hole, then
push and hold the override release lever down.
While holding the override release lever down,
push the lock button on the gear selector and
move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL (N)
position.
Using The Gear Selector Override
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL (N).
8. Reinstall the gear selector boot.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or
snow, it can often be moved using a rocking
motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to
clear the area around the front wheels. Push and
hold the lock button on the gear selector. Then
shift back and forth between DRIVE (D) and
REVERSE (R), while gently pressing the
accelerator. Use the least amount of accelerator
pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking
motion, without spinning the wheels or racing the
engine.
NOTE:
Shifts between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE (R) can
only be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph
(8 km/h) or less. Whenever the transmission
remains in NEUTRAL (N) for more than two
seconds, you must press the brake pedal to
engage DRIVE (D) or REVERSE (R).
7
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 185
186 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
NOTE:
Push the ESC OFF button, to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in Partial Off mode,
before rocking the vehicle Ú page 132. Once the
vehicle has been freed, push the ESC OFF button
again to restore ESC On mode.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may
lead to transmission overheating and failure.
Allow the engine to idle with the transmission in
NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five
rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize
overheating and reduce the risk of transmission
failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck
vehicle.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause damage, or even failure, of the axle and
tires. A tire could explode and injure someone.
Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30
seconds continuously without stopping when
you are stuck and do not let anyone near a
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting
between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or
drivetrain damage may result.
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too
fast may lead to transmission overheating and
failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not spin
the wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in
gear (no transmission shifting occurring).
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 186
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 187
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Towing Condition Wheel OFF The Ground ALL MODELS
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow
Front OK
Rear
NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD
7
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 187
188 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to
prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars
and other equipment designed for this purpose,
following equipment manufacturer’s instructions.
Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar
or other towing device to main structural members
of the vehicle, not to fascia/bumpers or associated
brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles
under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers,
defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition
must be in the ON/RUN mode.
If the ignition key is unavailable, or the vehicle's
battery is discharged, for instructions on shifting
the transmission out of PARK (P) for towing
Ú page 184.
FCA US LLC recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
NOTE:
If flatbed equipment is not available, this vehicle
must be towed with the front wheels OFF the
ground (using a towing dolly, or wheel lift
equipment with the front wheels raised).
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced
Accident Response System.
This feature is a communication network that
takes effect in the event of an impact Ú page 150.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to
record data that will assist in understanding how a
vehicle’s systems performed under certain crash
or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle Ú page 151.
CAUTION!
Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck,
do not attach to front or rear suspension
components. Damage to your vehicle may
result from improper towing.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission
damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 188
189
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil
change indicator system. The oil change indicator
system will remind you that it is time to take your
vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil
change indicator message will illuminate. This
means that service is required for your vehicle.
Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips,
trailer tow, extended engine idle time, extremely
hot or cold ambient temperatures will influence
when the “Oil Change Required” message is
displayed. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as
possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change
indicator message after completing the scheduled
oil change. If a scheduled oil change is performed
by someone other than an authorized dealer, to
reset the message Ú page 41.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), 350
hours of engine run time or 12 months, whichever
comes first. The 350 hours of engine run or idle
time is generally only a concern for fleet
customers.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
Check engine oil level.
Check windshield washer fluid level.
Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear
or damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irreg-
ular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indi-
cator system turns on.
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir
and brake master cylinder, fill as needed.
Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
8
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 189
190 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE PLAN
Refer to the maintenance schedule for the required maintenance intervals. More frequent maintenance may be needed in severe conditions, such as dusty areas
and very short trip driving. In some extreme conditions, additional maintenance not specified in the maintenance schedule may be required.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
Change oil and filter.
Rotate the tires at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses, lines and parking brake.
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions.
Inspect and replace the Evaporative System Fresh Air Filter as necessary; replacement may be more frequent if vehicle is operated in extreme dusty conditions.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 190
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 191
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, boot seals, tie rod ends, and replace if
necessary.
X X X X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function. X X X X X X X
Inspect front accessory drive belt, tensioner, idler pulley, and
replace if necessary.
X
8
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 191
192 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter.
1
X X X X X
Replace the cabin air filter. X X X X X X X
Change brake fluid every two years.
2
X X X X X X X
Replace spark plugs.
3
X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first.
X X
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X
1. Change engine air filter every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) if operated in dusty and off-road environment.
2. The brake fluid must be changed every 24 months. This interval is time based only, mileage intervals do not apply.
3. The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have
any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an accident.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 192
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 193
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L
1 — Air Cleaner Filter Cover 5 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
2 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir Cap 6 — Engine Oil Dipstick
3 — Oil Fill Cap 7 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 8 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
8
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 193
194 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
CHECKING OIL LEVEL
To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil
must be maintained at the correct level. Check the
oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel
stop. The best time to check the engine oil level is
about five minutes after a fully warmed up engine
is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground
will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings.
There are four possible dipstick types:
Crosshatched zone.
Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low
end of the range and MAX at the high end of the
range.
Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at the
MIN and the MAX ends of the range.
NOTE:
Always maintain the oil level within the crosshatch
markings on the dipstick.
Adding 1 quart (1 liter) of oil when the reading is at
the low end of the dipstick range will raise the oil
level to the high end of the range marking.
ADDING WASHER FLUID
The windshield and rear window washers share the
same fluid reservoir. The fluid reservoir is located
in the front of the engine compartment. Be sure to
check the fluid level in the reservoir at regular
intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer
solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate the
system for a few seconds to flush out the residual
water.
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take
some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel
and wipe clean the wiper blades, this will help
blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer
system in cold weather, select a solution or mixture
that meets or exceeds the temperature range of
your climate. This rating information can be found
on most washer fluid containers.
MAINTENANCE-FREE BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free
battery. You will never have to add water, and
periodic maintenance is not required.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will
cause aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could
damage your engine.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer
solvents are flammable. They could ignite and
burn you. Care must be exercised when filling or
working around the washer solution.
WARNING!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and
can burn or even blind you. Do not allow
battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or
clothing. Do not lean over a battery when
attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or
on skin, flush the area immediately with large
amounts of water Ú page 181.
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not
use a booster battery or any other booster
source with an output greater than 12 Volts.
Do not allow cable clamps to touch each
other.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 194
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 195
PRESSURE WASHING
Cleaning the engine compartment with a high
pressure washer is not recommended.
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service
personnel, special tools, and equipment to
perform all service operations in an expert
manner. Service Manuals are available which
include detailed service information for your
vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in
civil penalties being assessed against you.
ENGINE OIL
Engine Oil Selection
Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluids
Ú page 240.
American Petroleum Institute (API)
Approved Engine Oil
These symbols mean that the oil has been certified
by the API. The manufacturer only recommends API
trademark oils.
The API Starburst trademark certifies
0W-20, 0W-30 and 5W-30 engine oils.
The API Donut trademark certifies
0W-40 and 5W-40 engine oil.
Battery posts, terminals, and related accesso-
ries contain lead and lead compounds. Wash
hands after handling.
CAUTION!
It is essential when replacing the cables on
the battery that the positive cable is attached
to the positive post and the negative cable is
attached to the negative post. Battery posts
are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and
are identified on the battery case. Cable
clamps should be tight on the terminal posts
and free of corrosion.
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is
in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery
cables before connecting the charger to the
battery. Do not use a “fast charger” to provide
starting voltage.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Precautions have been taken to safeguard all
parts and connections however, the pressures
generated by these machines is such that
complete protection against water ingress
cannot be guaranteed.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which
you have the knowledge and the proper
equipment. If you have any doubt about your
ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle
to a competent mechanic.
8
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 195
196 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Synthetic Engine Oils
Your engine was designed for synthetic engine oils,
only use synthetic API approved engine oils.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the
engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE
viscosity grade number should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against
the addition of any additives (other than leak
detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil is an
engineered product and its performance may be
impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil
Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine
oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil
filters, indiscriminately discarded, can present a
problem to the environment. Contact an
authorized dealer, service station or governmental
agency for advice on how and where used oil and
oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
ENGINE OIL FILTER
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new
filter at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
A full-flow type disposable oil filter should be used
for replacement. The quality of replacement filters
varies considerably. Only high quality Mopar®
certified filters should be used.
ENGINE AIR CLEANER FILTER
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 190.
NOTE:
Be sure to follow the Severe Duty Conditions main-
tenance interval if applicable Ú page 189.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement filters varies
considerably. Only high quality Mopar® certified
filters should be used.
AIR CONDITIONER MAINTENANCE
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized
dealer at the start of each warm season. This
service should include cleaning of the condenser
fins and a performance test. Drive belt tension
should also be checked at this time.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as
the chemicals can damage your engine. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) can provide a measure of protection in the
case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air
induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless
such removal is necessary for repair or
maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the
engine compartment before starting the vehicle
with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING!
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubri-
cants approved by FCA for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants
are flammable and can explode, injuring you.
Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants
can cause the system to fail, requiring costly
repairs. Refer to Warranty Information Book,
for further warranty information.
The air conditioning system contains refrig-
erant under high pressure. To avoid risk of
personal injury or damage to the system,
adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines
to be disconnected should be done by an
experienced technician.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 196
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 197
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling —
R-1234yf
R-1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydroflu-
oroolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the
Environmental Protection Agency and is an
ozone-friendly substance with a low
global-warming potential. The manufacturer
recommends that air conditioning service be
performed by an authorized dealer using recovery
and recycling equipment.
NOTE:
Use only the manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.
BODY LUBRICATION
Locks and all body pivot points, including such
items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and
rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and
hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with
a lithium-based grease, such as Mopar® Spray
White Lube to ensure quiet, easy operation and to
protect against rust and wear. Prior to the
application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit;
after lubricating excess oil and grease should be
removed. Particular attention should also be given
to hood latching components to ensure proper
function. When performing other underhood
services, the hood latch, release mechanism and
safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated
twice a year, preferably in the Autumn and Spring.
Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant,
such as Mopar® Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly
into the lock cylinder.
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth
and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove
accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long
periods may cause deterioration of the wiper
blades. Always use washer fluid when using the
wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice
from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of
contact with petroleum products such as engine
oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
on geographical area and frequency of use. If chat-
tering, marks, water lines or wet spots are present,
clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air
conditioning system as the chemicals can
damage your air conditioning components. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
8
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 197
198 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Wiper Service Position
If it is necessary to lift the blade from the
windshield (In the event of snow or blade
replacement) proceed as directed:
1. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to
the OFF position.
2. Turn the ignition to the MAR (ON/RUN) position
then to STOP.
3. After turning the ignition to the STOP, within
two minutes move the right stalk upward, into
the unstable (“anti-panic”) position, for at least
half of a second. The windshield wiper then
executes part of a stroke; at each command,
approximately 1/3 of a normal wiper stroke is
triggered.
NOTE:
The previous operation can be repeated up to
three times in order to move the blades to the most
suitable position.
4. Lift the blade from the windshield and proceed
with the required operation.
5. Carefully lower the blade, bringing it back in
contact with the windshield.
6. Bring the blade to the initial rest position,
turning the ignition to MAR (ON/RUN).
NOTE:
Do not operate the wiper with the blades lifted
from the windshield.
EXHAUST SYSTEM
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry
into the vehicle body is a properly maintained
engine exhaust system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust
system; or if the exhaust fumes can be detected
inside the vehicle; or when the underside or rear of
the vehicle is damaged; have an authorized
technician inspect the complete exhaust system
and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged,
deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, have the exhaust system inspected each
time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil
change. Replace as required.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic
converter will not require maintenance. However, it
is important to keep the engine properly tuned to
ensure proper catalyst operation and prevent
possible catalyst damage.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you uncon-
scious and can eventually poison you
Ú page 170.
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials
might be grass or leaves coming into contact
with your exhaust system. Do not park or operate
your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system
can contact anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
The catalytic converter requires the use of
unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will
destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an
emissions control device and may seriously
reduce engine performance and cause
serious damage to the engine.
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if
your vehicle is not kept in proper operating
condition. In the event of engine malfunction,
particularly involving engine misfire or other
apparent loss of performance, have your
vehicle serviced promptly. Continued opera-
tion of your vehicle with a severe malfunction
could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter
and vehicle.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 198
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 199
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly
malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching odor
may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst
overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn off
the engine and allow it to cool. Service, including a
tune-up to manufacturer's specifications, should
be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter
damage:
Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmis-
sion is in gear and the vehicle is in motion.
Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or
towing the vehicle.
Do not idle the engine with any ignition compo-
nents disconnected or removed, such as when
diagnostic testing, or for prolonged periods
during very rough idle or malfunctioning oper-
ating conditions.
COOLING SYSTEM
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection
every 12 months (before the onset of freezing
weather, where applicable). If the engine coolant is
dirty, the system should be drained, flushed, and
refilled with fresh Organic Additive Technology
(OAT) coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by an
authorized dealer. Check the front of the A/C
condenser for any accumulation of bugs, leaves,
etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a
garden hose vertically down the face of the
condenser.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle
rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the
connection at the coolant recovery bottle and
radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks. DO
NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP
WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your
radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from
under the hood, do not open the hood until the
radiator has had time to cool. Never open a
cooling system pressure cap when the radi-
ator or coolant bottle is hot.
Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away
from the radiator cooling fan when the hood is
raised. The fan starts automatically and may
start at any time, whether the engine is
running or not.
When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the igni-
tion to the OFF position. The fan is tempera-
ture controlled and can start at any time the
ignition is in the ON position.
8
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 199
200 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly
could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any
coolant is needed to be added to the system
please contact an authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant is dirty or contains visible
sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and
flush with OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032).
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 190.
Selection Of Coolant
For further information Ú page 240.
NOTE:
Mixing of engine coolant other than specified
OAT engine coolant, may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protec-
tion. OAT engine coolant is different and should
not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Tech-
nology (HOAT) engine coolant or any “globally
compatible” coolant. If a non-OAT engine
coolant is introduced into the cooling system in
an emergency, the cooling system will need to
be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT
coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant products. Do not use additional rust
inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant
and may plug the radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant. Use of
propylene glycol-based engine coolant is not
recommended.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to
the system please contact an authorized dealer.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle is built with engine coolant (OAT
coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows
extended maintenance intervals. This engine
coolant can be used up to 10 years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replacement.
To prevent reducing this extended maintenance
period, it is important that you use the same
engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using
OAT engine coolant that meets the requirements of
the manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032.
When adding engine coolant:
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/
Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km)
Formula OAT that meets the requirements of the
manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032.
Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine
coolant that meets the requirements of the
manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032
and distilled water. Use higher concentrations
(not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below
−34°F (−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact
an authorized dealer for assistance.
Use only high purity water such as distilled or
deionized water when mixing the water/engine
coolant (antifreeze) solution. The use of lower
quality water will reduce the amount of corro-
sion protection in the engine cooling system.
NOTE:
It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the
proper level of protection against freezing
according to the temperatures occurring in the
area where the vehicle is operated.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 200
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 201
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to
the system, please contact a local authorized
dealer.
Mixing engine coolant types is not recom-
mended and can result in cooling system
damage. If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in
an emergency, have an authorized dealer drain,
flush, and refill with OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) as soon as possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of
engine coolant, and to ensure that engine coolant
will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery
tank.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there
is any accumulation of foreign material on the
sealing surfaces.
The image on the coolant system
pressure cap is a reminder that the
radiator contains hot engine coolant
under pressure.
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant is a regulated
substance requiring proper disposal. Check with
your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion, do
not store ethylene glycol-based coolant in open
containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the
ground, clean up immediately. If ingested, seek
emergency assistance immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick
visual method for determining that the coolant
level is adequate. With the engine OFF and cold,
the level of the engine coolant in the bottle should
be between the “MIN” and “MAX” marks.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so
there is no need to remove the radiator/coolant
pressure cap unless checking for engine coolant
freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise an
authorized dealer of this. As long as the engine
operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant
only needs to be checked once a month.
When additional engine coolant is needed to
maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that
meets the requirements of the manufacturer
Material Standard MS.90032 should be added to
the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
WARNING!
Do not open a hot engine cooling system.
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when
the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated engine.
Heat causes pressure to build up in the
cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury,
do not remove the pressure cap while the
system is hot or under pressure.
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or
engine damage may result.
8
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 201
202 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
Cooling System Notes
NOTE:
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/kilo-
meters of operation, you may observe vapor
coming from the front of the engine compartment.
This is normally a result of moisture from rain,
snow, or high humidity accumulating on the
radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat
opens, allowing hot engine coolant to enter the
radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment
shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the
vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will soon
dissipate.
Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator
and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine
coolant needs to be added, the contents of the
coolant expansion bottle must also be protected
against freezing.
If frequent engine coolant additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure
tested for leaks.
Maintain engine coolant concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corro-
sion protection of your engine which contains
aluminum components.
Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle
overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your
vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, keep
the front of the condenser clean.
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or
Winter operation. If replacement is ever neces-
sary, install ONLY the correct type thermostat.
Other designs may result in unsatisfactory
engine cooling performance, poor gas mileage,
and increased emissions.
BRAKE SYSTEM
In order to ensure brake system performance, all
brake system components should be inspected
periodically. For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 190.
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid in the master cylinder should be checked
when performing under hood services or
immediately if the Brake Warning Light is
illuminated.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area
before removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to
bring the fluid level up to the requirements
described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc
brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the
brake pads wear. Brake fluid level should be
checked when pads are replaced. However, low
fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup
may be needed. Use only the manufacturer
recommended brake fluid Ú page 241.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in
abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive
lining wear, and possible brake damage. You
would not have your full braking capacity in an
emergency.
WARNING!
Use only the manufacturer recommended
brake fluid Ú page 241. Using the wrong type
of brake fluid can severely damage your brake
system and/or impair its performance. The
proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is
also identified on the original factory installed
hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 202
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 203
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid
to ensure optimum transmission performance and
life. Use only the manufacturer specified
transmission fluid Ú page 241. It is important to
maintain the transmission fluid at the correct level
using the recommended fluid.
NOTE:
No chemical flushes should be used in any trans-
mission; only the approved lubricant should be
used.
Special Additives
It is strongly recommended against using any
special additives in the transmission. Automatic
Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product
and its performance may be impaired by
supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any
fluid additives to the transmission. Avoid using
transmission sealers as they may adversely affect
seals.
To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that
has been in a tightly closed container. Keep
the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at
all times. Brake fluid in an open container
absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a
lower boiling point. This may cause it to boil
unexpectedly during hard or prolonged
braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This
could result in a collision.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result
in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts,
causing the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake
fluid can also damage painted and vinyl
surfaces; care should be taken to avoid its
contact with these surfaces.
Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contam-
inate the brake fluid. Brake seal components
could be damaged, causing partial or
complete brake failure. This could result in a
collision.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturer recommended fluid may cause
deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or
torque converter shudder Ú page 241.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your
transmission as the chemicals can damage your
transmission components. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
8
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 203
204 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating
conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not
required; therefore the transmission has no
dipstick. An authorized dealer can check your
transmission fluid level using special service tools.
If you notice fluid leakage or transmission
malfunction, visit an authorized dealer
immediately to have the transmission fluid level
checked. Operating the vehicle with an improper
fluid level can cause severe transmission damage.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid
installed at the factory will provide satisfactory
lubrication for the life of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required.
However, change the fluid and filter if the fluid
becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the
transmission is disassembled for any reason.
UPFITTER CONNECTORS — IF EQUIPPED
The preparation connectors are to be only used by
upfitters. This connector is located under the dash.
Connector Location
15 Way Vehicle Connector Functions and View
Connector Pin Numbers
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an
authorized dealer immediately. Severe
transmission damage may occur. An authorized
dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid
level accurately.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 204
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 205
PIN Function
1 Not Connected
2 Generator Voltage Sensor 2
3 Vehicle Speed Signal
4 Not Connected
5 Not Connected
6 Not Connected
7 Courtesy Lamp Feed
8 Ambient Lighting Control
9 Not Connected
10 Not Connected
11 Not Connected
12 Not Connected
13 Ignition Run/Start Output
14 Not Connected
15 Not Connected
8
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 205
206 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Upfitter Connector
This connector is supplied to the upfitter when the
vehicle is ordered with the applicable package.
2 Way Vehicle Connector Functions and View
Connector Pins
Upfitter Connector
This connector is supplied to the upfitter when the
vehicle is ordered with the applicable package.
For additional questions about these connectors
as well as general technical questions about
upfitting your Ram product, refer to
https://
www.ramtrucks.com/ram-commercial/
body-builders-guide.html/
or call
1 (866)-205-4102.
PIN Function
A Power Supply
B GND
CAUTION!
The maximum current load allowed is 15 amps
for continuous use.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 206
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 207
FUSES
General Information
The fuses protect electrical systems against
excessive current.
When a device does not work, you must check the
fuse element inside the blade fuse for a break/melt.
Also, please be aware that using power outlets for
extended periods of time with the engine off may
result in vehicle battery discharge.
Blade Fuses
Underhood Fuses
The Front Distribution Unit is located on the right
side of the engine compartment, next to the
battery. To access the fuses, remove fasteners and
remove the cover.
WARNING!
When replacing a blown fuse, always use an
appropriate replacement fuse with the same
amp rating as the original fuse. Never replace
a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating.
Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or
any other material. Do not place a fuse inside
a circuit breaker cavity or vice versa. Failure to
use proper fuses may result in serious
personal injury, fire and/or property damage.
Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the
ignition is off and that all the other services
are switched off and/or disengaged.
If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an
authorized dealer.
If a general protection fuse for safety systems
(air bag system, braking system), power unit
systems, (engine system, transmission
system) steering system or Body Control
Module (BCM) blows, contact an authorized
dealer.
CAUTION!
If it is necessary to wash the engine
compartment, take care not to directly hit the fuse
box, and the windshield wiper motors with water.
1 — Fuse Element
2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse element
3 — Blade fuse with a bad/not functional fuse
element (blown fuse)
CAUTION!
When installing the power distribution center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is
properly positioned and fully latched. Failure
to do so may allow water to get into the power
distribution center and possibly result in an
electrical system failure.
8
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 207
208 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Power Distribution Center Location
The ID number of the electrical component corresponding to each fuse can be found on the back of the cover.
Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F01 60 Amp Blue – Body Controller
F02 40 Amp Orange –
Rear Power Windows, Fog Lamps,
Front Heated Seats *
F02 30 Amp Green –
Rear Power Windows, Front Heated
Seats Fog Lamps *
F02 20 Amp Yellow – Front Heated Seats *
F03 20 Amp Yellow – Ignition Switch
F04 40 Amp Orange – BSM System Module
F06 20 Amp Yellow – Radiator Fan - Low Speed
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 208
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 209
F07 50 Amp Red – Radiator Fan - High Speed
F08 40 Amp Orange – Blower Motor
F10 – 15 Amp Blue Horn
F11 – 10 Amp Red Secondary Loads ECM
F14 – 15 Amp Blue High Beam
F15 – – –
F16 – 5 Amp Tan ECM and Transmission Shifter
F17 – 25 Amp Clear ECM Power Loads
F18 – 5 Amp Tan ECM Load, Main Relay
F19 – 7.5 Amp Brown Air Conditioning
F20 – 30 Amp Green Rear Defroster *
F21 – 5 Amp Tan Key Unlock
F22 – 10 Amp Red Primary ECM Loads
F23 – 20 Amp Yellow BSM System
F24 – 5 Amp Tan
BSM System, Positive Key and
Steering Angle Sensor
F30 – 15 Amp Blue
2nd Instrument Panel Power Outlet
(Battery)
F83 20 Amp Yellow – Fuel Pump
F84 – 15 Amp Blue AT Module
Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description
* If Equipped
8
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 209
210 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Interior Fuses
The interior fuse panel is part of the Body Control
Module (BCM) and is located on the driver's side
under the instrument panel.
NOTE:
Please contact an authorized dealer for BCM fuse
replacement.
Interior Power Distribution Center Location
Fuse Panel Cavity Locations
F85 – 15 Amp Blue
Rear Power Outlet 12 Volts
(ACC/ON/RUN)
F86 – 15 Amp Blue
IP Power Outlet 12 Volts
(ACC/ON/RUN)
F87 – 5 Amp Tan IBS
F88 – 7.5 Amp Brown External Mirror Defrost *
Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description
* If Equipped
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 210
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 211
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
F53 5 Amp Beige KL 30 (+30) - IPC, FTM
F38 20 Amp Yellow Central Doors Locking
F36 15 Amp Blue
KL 30 (+30) - TPMS, EOBD, HVAC, Radio, USB, SGW
F43 15 Amp Blue Bi-Directional Washer Pump
F48 20 Amp Yellow Passenger Power Windows
F13 7.5 Amp Brown Supply for left low beam bulb or discharge lamp
F50 7.5 Amp Brown KL 15 (+15) - Air-Bag
F51 7.5 Amp Brown
KL 15 (+15) - External Mirror Adjustment
Command, HVAC, RVC, HWB Coils
F37 5 Amp Beige
KL 15 (+15) - Brake Pedal Switch (N.O.), IPC, Brake
Pedal Switch (N.C.)
F49 5 Amp Beige
KL 15 (+15) - PAM, CSS Lighting, TTM, SGW,
Heaters Light, ECM Backlighting
F31 5 Amp Beige KL 15a (INT A) - HWB, MCO
F47 20 Amp Yellow Driver Power Windows
8
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 211
212 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Central Unit Fuse Panel
The central power fuse panel is located on the
driver’s side under the instrument panel.
Central Power Distribution Location
Fuse Panel
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F1 10 Amp Red Front Heated Seat Passenger *
F2 10 Amp Red Front Heated Seat Driver *
F3 20 Amp Yellow Rear Power Window Driver side *
F4 20 Amp Yellow Rear Power Window Passenger side *
F5 15 Amp Blue Fog Lamps *
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 212
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 213
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs, Names, And Part Numbers
In the instance a bulb needs to be replaced, this section includes bulb description and replacement part numbers. All of the inside bulbs are brass or glass-wedge
base. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved.
NOTE:
See an authorized dealer for LED bulb replacement.
Interior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
Front Courtesy Lamps C10W
Rear Courtesy Lamps C10W
Luggage Lamp C5W
Exterior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
Front Low Beam Headlamp H11
Front High Beam Headlamps HB3
Front Side Marker Lamps LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Front Parking/Daytime Running Lamps W21W
Front Turn Signal Lamps WY21W
8
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 213
214 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Replacing Exterior Bulbs
HEADLAMPS
See below steps to replace:
1. Remove the plastic cap from the back of the
headlamp housing.
2. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise.
3. Remove the bulb and replace as needed.
4. Install the bulb and rotate clockwise to lock in
place.
5. Reinstall the plastic cap.
FRONT TURN SIGNAL LAMPS
See below steps to replace:
1. Remove the cap from the back of the outer
upper headlamp housing.
2. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise and remove.
3. Install the bulb into socket.
4. Rotate the bulb/socket clockwise into the
lamp locking it in place.
5. Reinstall the plastic cap.
PARKING AND DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS
See below steps to replace:
1. Remove the cap from the back of the outer
lower headlamp housing.
2. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise and remove.
3. Install the bulb into socket, and rotate bulb/
socket clockwise into lamp locking it in place.
4. Reinstall the plastic cap.
Rear Stop Lamp P21W
Rear Turn Signal Lamps PY21W
Rear Tail Lamps P21/5W
Rear Side Marker Lamps LED (Serviced at an authorized adealer)
Center Mount Brake Lamp W5W
Reverse Light W16W
Front Fog Lamps H11
NOTE:
Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from an authorized dealer. If a bulb needs to be replaced visit an authorized dealer or refer to
the applicable Service Manual.
Exterior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 214
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 215
FRONT/REAR SIDE MARKER LAMPS
The front/rear side marker lamps are LED and not
serviced separately. See an authorized dealer for
replacement of these lights.
REAR TAIL, STOP, BACKUP AND TURN SIGNAL
LAMPS
The rear light cluster contains taillight, brake light,
direction indicator and reverse/rear fog light bulbs.
To access the light clusters, see below steps to
replace:
1. Open the rear doors.
2. Remove the screws and remove the tail lamp
assembly.
3. Remove the screws and separate the
backplate from the lamp housing.
4. Remove the tail, stop, or turn signal bulbs by
pushing them slightly and turning counter-
clockwise.
5. Remove the backup lamp bulb by pulling
straight out.
6. Replace lamps as required and reinstall lamp.
The bulbs are arranged inside the light cluster as
follows:
THIRD BRAKE LIGHT (CENTER MOUNT)
See below steps to replace:
1. For versions with tailgate, loosen the two
fastening screws and extract the cluster.
2. For versions with swing doors, remove rubber
plugs, remove retaining tabs and extract the
cluster.
3. For versions with high roof and swing doors,
remove the pressure-fit plastic guard and
rubber cap using a screwdriver, release the
retaining tags as shown in the figure and
remove the unit.
4. Remove the appropriate tabs and remove the
bulb holder.
5. Remove the snap-fitted bulb and replace it.
LICENSE PLATE LIGHTS
See below steps to replace:
1. Disengage the holding tabs and remove the
lens by lifting to the left.
2. Remove the bulbs by releasing them from the
side contacts; insert the new bulbs and make
sure they are correctly clamped between these
contacts.
Replacing Interior Bulbs
DOME LAMP WITH SPOT LIGHTS
See below steps to replace:
1. Remove dome lamp by depressing the tabs,
using a suitable tool.
Dome Lamp Assembly
2. Open protective cover.
8
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 215
216 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Dome Lamp
3. Replace the bulbs releasing them from the
side contacts making sure that the new bulbs
are correctly secured between the contacts.
4. Close the protective cover and reposition it
back into its housing, making sure that it locks
into place.
REAR ROOF LAMP
See below steps to replace:
1. Remove roof lamp by pressing the tabs, using
a suitable tool.
Roof Lamp
2. Open the cover.
Roof Lamp (Reverse Side)
3. Replace the bulb releasing them from the side
contacts making sure that the new bulbs are
correctly secured between the contacts.
1 — Protective Cover
2 — Bulbs
1 — Cover
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 216
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 217
Roof Lamp (Reverse Side)
4. Close the protective cover and reposition it
back into its housing, making sure that it locks
into place.
TIRES
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the
following information: Tire Markings, Tire
Identification Numbers, Tire Terminology and
Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading.
Tire Markings
Tire Markings
NOTE:
P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on US
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter
“P” molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
European — Metric tire sizing is based on Euro-
pean design standards. Tires designed to this
standard have the tire size molded into the side-
wall beginning with the section width. The letter
"P" is absent from this tire size designation.
Example: 215/65R15 96H.
LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on
US design standards. The size designation for
LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires
except for the letters “LT” that are molded into
the sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: LT235/85R16.
Temporary spare tires are designed for tempo-
rary emergency use only. Temporary high pres-
sure compact spare tires have the letter “T” or
“S” molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
High flotation tire sizing is based on US design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter
molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5
R15 LT.
1 — Bulb
1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code
(TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
8
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 217
218 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TIRE SIZING CHART
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
"R" means radial construction, or
"D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 218
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 219
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading,
road conditions, and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
LL = Light load tire or
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
EXAMPLE:
8
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 219
220 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including
the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is
not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
01 means the year 2001
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could
represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 220
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 221
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the
driver's side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including
the spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and
inflate to the recommended pressure for your
vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door) Example Tire Placard Location (B-pillar)
Term Definition
B-pillar
The vehicle B-pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the
front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has
not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in
units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire
inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into
the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
The manufacturer recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the
tire placard.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading
capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire
inflation pressures.
8
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 221
222 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about
the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the
vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear,
and spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not
exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your
vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load carrying
capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions,
tire size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified
on the Tire and Loading Information Placard
Ú page 67.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded.
For further information on GAWR, vehicle loading,
and trailer towing Ú page 67.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of
your vehicle, locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading
Information placard. The combined weight of
occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue
weight (if applicable) should never exceed the
weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load
Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 222
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 223
(4) The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will
be five 150 lb passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and
there will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle,
the amount of available cargo and luggage load
capacity is 295 kg (635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as
shown in step 4.
NOTE:
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
The following table shows examples on how to
calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing
capacities of your vehicle with varying seating
configurations and number and size of occu-
pants. This table is for illustration purposes only
and may not be accurate for the seating and
load carry capacity of your vehicle.
For the following example, the combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed
865 lb (392 kg).
8
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 223
224 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 224
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 225
(Continued)
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the
safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.
Four primary areas are affected by improper tire
pressure:
Safety
Fuel Economy
Tread Wear
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Safety
Both underinflation and overinflation affect the
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of
sluggish response or over responsiveness in the
steering.
NOTE:
Unequal tire pressures from side to side may
cause erratic and unpredictable steering
response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may
cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling
resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause
abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable
ride. Overinflation produces a jarring and
uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver's side B-pillar or rear edge of the driver's
side door.
At least once a month:
Check and adjust tire pressure with a good
quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not
make a visual judgment when determining
proper inflation. Tires may look properly inflated
even when they are under inflated.
Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible
damage.
WARNING!
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and
can cause collisions.
Underinflation increases tire flexing and can
result in overheating and tire failure.
Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes
can cause damage that result in tire failure.
Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly,
resulting in loss of vehicle control.
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering
problems. You could lose control of your
vehicle.
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the
vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to
drift to the right or left.
Always drive with each tire inflated to the
recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.
8
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 225
226 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are
always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire
inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The cold
tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire
sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a
wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire
pressures vary with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi
(7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change.
Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure
inside a garage, especially in the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C)
and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then
the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased
by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for
every 12°F (7°C) for this outside temperature
condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to
40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this
normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will
be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe
speeds and within posted speed limits. Where
speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle
can be driven at high speeds, maintaining correct
tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased
tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be
required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to
an authorized tire dealer or original equipment
vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating
speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
Radial Ply Tires
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if
it meets the following criteria:
The tire has not been driven on when flat.
The damage is only on the tread section of your
tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).
The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch
(6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs
and additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced
immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical
size and service description (Load Index and
Speed Symbol). Replace the tire pressure sensor
as well as it is not designed to be reused.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under
maximum load is dangerous. The added strain
on your tires could cause them to fail. You could
have a serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle
loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous
speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of
tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to
handle poorly. The instability could cause a
collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of
four. Never combine them with other types of
tires.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 226
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 227
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive
50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a
rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss of
inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode. A Run
Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is
of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire
reaches the Run Flat mode it has limited driving
capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately.
A Run Flat tire is not repairable. When a Run Flat
tire is changed after driving with under inflated tire
condition, please replace the TPMS sensor as it is
not designed to be reused when driven under Run
Flat mode 14 psi (96 kPa) condition.
NOTE:
TPMS Sensor must be replaced after driving the
vehicle on a flat tire condition.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at
full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the
Run Flat mode.
For more information Ú page 135.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions,
do not spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph
(48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds
continuously without stopping.
For further information Ú page 185.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment
tires to help you in determining when your tires
should be replaced.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the
tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the
tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm).
When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the tire should be replaced.
For further information Ú page 228.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
Driving style.
Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pres-
sures can cause uneven wear patterns to
develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life, resulting in
the need for earlier tire replacement.
Distance driven.
Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V
or higher, and Summer tires typically have a
reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires per
the vehicle scheduled maintenance is highly
recommended.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause tire damage or failure. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your
vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
for more than 30 seconds continuously when
you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after
six years, regardless of the remaining tread.
Failure to follow this warning can result in
sudden tire failure. You could lose control and
have a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
8
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 227
228 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
NOTE:
Wheel valve stem must be replaced as well when
installing new tires due to wear and tear in existing
tires.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as
little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires
from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of
many characteristics. They should be inspected
regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation
pressures. The manufacturer strongly
recommends that you use tires equivalent to the
originals in size, quality and performance when
replacement is needed Ú page 227. Refer to the
Tire and Loading Information placard or the
Vehicle Certification Label for the size designation
of your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol for
your tire will be found on the original equipment
tire sidewall.
For more information relating to the Load Index
and Speed Symbol of a tire Ú page 218.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or
two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can
seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever
replace a wheel, make sure that the wheel’s
specifications match those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any
questions you may have on tire specifications or
capability. Failure to use equivalent replacement
tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and
ride of your vehicle.
TIRE TYPES
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons
(Spring, Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction
levels may vary between different all season tires.
All season tires can be identified by the M+S, M&S,
M/S or MS designation on the tire sidewall. Use all
season tires only in sets of four; failure to do so
may adversely affect the safety and handling of
your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires —
If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in
snow or on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with
Summer tires, be aware these tires are not
designed for Winter or cold driving conditions.
Install Winter tires on your vehicle when ambient
temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads
are covered with ice or snow. For more
information, contact an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or
speed rating other than that specified for your
vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved
tires and wheels may change suspension
dimensions and performance characteristics,
resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpre-
dictable handling and stress to steering and
suspension components. You could lose
control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death. Use only the tire and
wheel sizes with load ratings approved for
your vehicle.
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally
equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a
smaller load index could result in tire over-
loading and failure. You could lose control and
have a collision.
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in
sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different
size may result in false speedometer and
odometer readings.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 228
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 229
Summer tires do not contain the all season
designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on the
tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow
tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified
by a “mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire
sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the
original equipment tires. Use snow tires
only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your
vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than
what was originally equipped with your vehicle and
should not be operated at sustained speeds over
75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph
(120 km/h) refer to original equipment or an
authorized tire dealer for recommended safe
operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice,
skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces
may be poorer than that of non-studded tires.
Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local
laws should be checked before using these tire
types.
SPARE TIRES — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead
of a spare tire Ú page 179.
For restrictions when towing with a spare tire
designated for temporary emergency use
Ú page 72.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the
original equipment tire and wheel found on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire
may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle. If
your vehicle has this option, refer to an authorized
tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation
pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency
use only. You can identify if your vehicle is
equipped with a compact spare by looking at the
spare tire description on the Tire and Loading
Information Placard located on the driver’s side
door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the
letter “T” or “S” preceding the size designation.
Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
opportunity.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions.
You could lose vehicle control, resulting in
severe injury or death. Driving too fast for
conditions also creates the possibility of loss of
vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do
not take your vehicle through an automatic car
wash with a compact or limited use temporary
spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may
result.
8
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 229
230 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel,
since the wheel is designed specifically for the
compact spare tire. Do not install more than one
compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any
given time.
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency
use only. You can identify if your vehicle is
equipped with a collapsible spare by looking at the
spare tire description on the Tire and Loading
Information Placard located on the driver’s side
door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Collapsible spare tire description example: 165/
80-17 101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is
properly installed to the vehicle. Inflate the
collapsible tire using the electric air pump before
lowering the vehicle.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel,
since the wheel is designed specifically for the
collapsible spare tire.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use
only. This tire may look like the originally equipped
tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is
not. This spare tire may have limited tread life.
When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use full size spare tire
needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle
at the first opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary
emergency use only. This tire is identified by a label
located on the limited use spare wheel. This label
contains the driving limitations for this spare. This
tire may look like the original equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as your
original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle
at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for
temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread
wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the
warnings, which apply to your spare. Failure to
do so could result in spare tire failure and loss
of vehicle control.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for
temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread
wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the
warnings, which apply to your spare. Failure to
do so could result in spare tire failure and loss
of vehicle control.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 230
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 231
WHEEL AND WHEEL TRIM CARE
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum
and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned
regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to
maintain their luster and to prevent corrosion.
Wash wheels with the same soap solution
recommended for the body of the vehicle and
remember to always wash when the surfaces are
not hot to the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration
caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium
chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road
chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on dirt
roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap to
wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or
a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s
protective coating that helps keep them from
corroding and tarnishing.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including
excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the
selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals and
equipment to prevent damage to the wheels.
Mopar® Wheel Treatment or Mopar® Chrome
Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for
aluminum or chrome wheels.
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels with
wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the
brakes to remove the water droplets from the
brake components. This activity will remove the
red rust on the brake rotors and prevent vehicle
vibration when braking.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive
more than the speed listed on the limited use
spare wheel. Keep inflated to the cold tire
inflation pressures listed on your Tire and
Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and
reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could
result in loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use
acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or
harsh brushes. Many aftermarket wheel
cleaners and automatic car washes may
damage the wheel's protective finish. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar®
Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle
brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel's protective
finish. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap,
Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
8
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 231
232 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low
Gloss Clear Coat Wheels
TIRE CHAINS AND TRACTION DEVICES
Due to limited clearance, tire chains or traction
devices are not recommended.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle
operate at different loads and perform different
steering, driving, and braking functions. For these
reasons, they wear at unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of
tires. The benefits of rotation are especially
worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as
those on all season type tires. Rotation will
increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow
and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 190.
The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should
be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
The suggested rotation method is the “forward
cross” shown in the following diagram. This
rotation pattern does not apply to some directional
tires that must not be reversed.
Tire Rotation (Forward Cross)
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories
were established by the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the
tire's manufacturer in each category is
shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform
to Federal safety requirements in
addition to these grades.
TREADWEAR
The Treadwear grade is a comparative
rating, based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and one-half times as well on
the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty
wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives,
or polishing compounds. They will permanently
damage this finish and such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
HAND WASH ONLY USING MILD SOAP AND
WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular
basis; this is all that is required to maintain this
finish.
CAUTION!
Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains
are used.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 232
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 233
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
TRACTION GRADES
The Traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades
represent the tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement, as measured under
controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
TEMPERATURE GRADES
The Temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat, when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance, which all
passenger vehicle tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel, than the
minimum required by law.
STORING THE VEHICLE
If you are storing your vehicle for more than 3
weeks, we recommend that you take the following
steps to minimize the drain on your vehicle's
battery:
Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more,
run the air conditioning system at idle for about
five minutes in the fresh air and high blower
setting. This will ensure adequate system lubri-
cation to minimize the possibility of compressor
damage when the system is started again.
BODYWORK
PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC
A
GENTS
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to
geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that
make roads passable in snow and ice and those
that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during
other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in
your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your
vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on
which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold
weather and other extreme conditions will have an
adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody
protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will
enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the
corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based
on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and
does not include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation,
or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and
possible tire failure.
8
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 233
234 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal
of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation
Stone and gravel impact
Insects, tree sap and tar
Salt in the air near seacoast localities
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants
BODY AND UNDERBODY MAINTENANCE
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights
and fog lights that are lighter and less susceptible
to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and
therefore different lens cleaning procedures must
be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses
and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry
cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap
solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components,
solvents, steel wool or other aggressive material to
clean the lenses.
PRESERVING THE BODYWORK
Washing
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your
vehicle in the shade using Mopar® Car Wash, or
a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels
completely with water.
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have
accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar®
Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove.
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar®
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to
protect your paint finish. Use precautions to not
scratch the paint.
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power
buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out
the paint finish.
Special Care
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you
drive near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage
at least once a month.
It is important that the drain holes in the lower
edges of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be
kept clear and open.
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the
paint, touch them up immediately.
If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or
similar cause that destroys the paint and protec-
tive coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon
as possible.
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals,
fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such
materials are well packaged and sealed.
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads,
consider mud or stone shields behind each
wheel.
Use Mopar® Touch Up Paint on scratches as
soon as possible. An authorized dealer has
touch up paint to match the color of your
vehicle.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning mate-
rials such as steel wool or scouring powder
that will scratch metal and painted surfaces.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8,274 kPa) can result in damage or removal
of paint and decals.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 234
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 235
INTERIORS
SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery
and carpeting.
NOTE:
Power washing is not allowed inside the vehicle
(both passenger and cargo area).
PLASTIC AND COATED PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster
Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this
vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When cleaning
the lenses, care must be taken to avoid scratching
the plastic.
Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution
may be used, but do not use high alcohol content
or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean
with a clean damp cloth. Dry with a soft cloth.
LEATHER SURFACES
Mopar® Total Clean is specifically recommended
for leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by
regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small
particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage
the leather upholstery and should be removed
promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be
removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar® Total
Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your
leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not
use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents,
detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
your leather upholstery.
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to
show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye
transfer more so than darker colors. The leather is
designed for easy cleaning, and the manufacturer
recommends Mopar® total care leather cleaner
applied on a cloth to clean the leather seats as
needed.
GLASS SURFACES
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular
basis with Mopar® Glass Cleaner, or any
commercial household-type glass cleaner. Never
use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when
cleaning the inside rear window equipped with
electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio
antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp
instruments that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner
on the towel or cloth that you are using. Do not
spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning
purposes. Many are potentially flammable, and
if used in closed areas they may cause
respiratory harm.
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repel-
lents, suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the
plastic, painted, or decorated surfaces of the
interior may cause permanent damage. Wipe
away immediately.
Damage caused by these type of products
may not be covered by your New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or
Ketone based cleaning products to clean leather
upholstery, as damage to the upholstery may
result.
8
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 235
236
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
The VIN is found on the left front corner of the
instrument panel, visible through the windshield.
Vehicle Identification Number
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake
systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems lose
normal capability, the remaining system will still
function. However, there will be some loss of
overall braking effectiveness. You may notice
increased pedal travel during application, greater
pedal force required to slow or stop, and potential
activation of the Brake System Warning Light.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine off),
the brakes will still function. However, the effort
required to brake the vehicle will be much greater
than that required with the power system
operating.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to
ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to the
vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed and
reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nuts/bolts should
be torqued using a properly calibrated torque
wrench using a six-sided (hex) deep wall socket.
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
**Use only authorized dealer recommended lug
nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil
before tightening.
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
63 Ft-Lb
(86 N·m)
Steel
Wheels Only
89 Ft-Lb
(120 N·m)
Aluminum
Wheels Only
M12 x 1.25 17 mm
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 236
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 237
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to
mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or
loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until
each nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure
that the socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/bolt
(do not insert it halfway).
Torque Patterns
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt
torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are
properly seated against the wheel.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
While operating on gasoline with the
recommended octane, hearing a light knocking
sound from the engine is not a cause for concern.
However, if the engine is heard making a heavy
knocking sound, see an authorized dealer
immediately. Use of gasoline with an octane
number lower than 87 can cause engine failure
and may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as
hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you
experience these symptoms, try another brand of
gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.
2.4L ENGINE
This engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide
excellent fuel economy and
performance when using high quality
unleaded regular gasoline having a octane rating
of 87 using the (R+M)/2 method. The use of
premium gasoline is not recommended, as it will
not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in
these engines.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow
this warning may result in personal injury.
9
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 237
238 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
REFORMULATED GASOLINE
Many areas of the country require the use of
cleaner-burning gasoline referred to as
“reformulated gasoline”. Reformulated gasoline
contains oxygenates and are specifically blended
to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air
quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended.
Properly blended reformulated gasoline will
provide improved performance and durability of
engine and fuel system components.
GASOLINE/OXYGENATE BLENDS
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with
oxygenates such as ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline
containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or
gasoline containing methanol are not the
responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
E-85 USAGE IN NON-FLEX FUEL
V
EHICLES
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with
gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15).
Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with
E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of these
symptoms:
Operate in a lean mode.
OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on.
Poor engine performance.
Poor cold start and cold drivability.
Increased risk for fuel system component
corrosion.
CNG AND LP FUEL SYSTEM
M
ODIFICATIONS
Modifications that allow the engine to run on
compressed natural gas (CNG) or liquid propane
(LP) may result in damage to the engine,
emissions, and fuel system components. Problems
that result from running CNG or LP are not the
responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
MMT IN GASOLINE
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl
(MMT) is a manganese-containing metallic additive
that is blended into some gasoline to increase
octane. Gasoline blended with MMT provides no
performance advantage beyond gasoline of the
same octane number without MMT. Gasoline
blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and
reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that
gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle. The
MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on
the gasoline pump, therefore, you should ask a
gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains
MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California
reformulated gasoline.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol,
or gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol
(E-15). Use of these blends may result in starting
and drivability problems, damage critical fuel
system components, cause emissions to exceed
the applicable standard, and/or cause the
Malfunction Indicator Light to illuminate. Please
observe pump labels as they should clearly
communicate if a fuel contains greater than
15% ethanol (E-15).
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 238
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 239
(Continued)
MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper
octane rating, gasolines that contain detergents,
corrosion, and stability additives are
recommended. Using gasolines that have these
additives will help improve fuel economy, reduce
emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline contains a higher level of
detergents to further aide in minimizing
engine and fuel system deposits. When
available, the usage of Top Tier Detergent Gasoline
is recommended. Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a
list of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents
should be avoided. Many of these materials
intended for gum and varnish removal may contain
active solvents or similar ingredients. These can
harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials.
FUEL SYSTEM CAUTIONS
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your
vehicle’s performance:
The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by
Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can impair
engine performance and damage the emis-
sions control system.
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic
converter to overheat. If you notice a pungent
burning odor or some light smoke, your engine
may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may
require immediate service. Contact an autho-
rized dealer for service assistance.
The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recom-
mended. Most of these products contain high
concentrations of methanol. Fuel system
damage or vehicle performance problems
resulting from the use of such fuels or addi-
tives is not the responsibility of the manufac-
turer and may void or not be covered under
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
9
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 239
240 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FLUID CAPACITIES
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
2.4L Engine 16 Gallons 60.5 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
2.4L Engine 5.5 Quarts 5.2 Liters
Cooling System*
2.4L Engine 7.2 Quarts 6.8 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant reservoir filled to MAX level.
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
(240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent
meeting the requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil – 2.4L Engine
We recommend using Mopar® SAE 0W-20 Full Synthetic Engine Oil which
meets the requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS-6395.
Equivalent full synthetic SAE 0W-20 engine oil can be used but must have the
API Starburst trademark Ú page 195.
Engine Oil Filter
We recommend using a Mopar® Engine Oil Filter. If a Mopar® Engine Oil Filter
is unavailable, only use filters that meet or exceed SAE/USCAR-36 Filter
Performance Requirements.
Fuel Selection – 2.4L Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 240
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 241
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
CAUTION!
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant, may result in engine damage and may decrease
corrosion protection. OAT engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant or any “globally
compatible” coolant. If a non-OAT engine coolant is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed,
and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible
with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant. Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant is not recommended.
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission
Use only Mopar® ZF 8 & 9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or
equivalent.
Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your
transmission.
Brake Master Cylinder
We recommend using Mopar® DOT 4.
The fluid must be changed every 24 months. This interval is time based only,
mileage intervals do not apply.
Power Steering Reservoir
Use Pentosin CHF 11S power steering fluid meeting the manufacturer
Material Standard MS-11655.
9
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 241
242
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE
PREPARE FOR THE APPOINTMENT
All work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the
service manager. Keep a maintenance log of your
vehicle's service history. This can often provide a
clue to the current problem.
PREPARE A LIST
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the
specific work you want done. If you've had an
accident or work done that is not on your
maintenance log, let the service advisor know.
BE REASONABLE WITH REQUESTS
If you list a number of items and you must have
your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the
situation with the service advisor and list the items
in order of priority. At many authorized dealers, you
may obtain a rental vehicle (additional charges
may apply). If you need a rental, it is advisable to
make these arrangements when you call for an
appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
FCA US LLC and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be
happy with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized
dealer. We strongly recommend that you take the
vehicle to an authorized dealer. They know your
vehicle the best, and are most concerned that you
get prompt and high quality service. FCA US LLC’s
authorized dealers have the facilities,
factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the
latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be
resolved with this process.
If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk
to the general manager or owner of the autho-
rized dealer. They want to know if you need
assistance.
If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the
concern, you may contact FCA US LLC’s
customer center.
Any communication to FCA US LLC's customer
center should include the following information:
Owner's name and address
Owner's telephone number (mobile, home and
office)
Authorized dealer name
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (866) 726-4636
FCA CANADA INC. CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983
French
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 242
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 243
MEXICO
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D.F.
In Mexico City: (800) 505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52) 55 50817568
PUERTO RICO AND US VIRGIN ISLANDS
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (866) 726-4636
Fax: (787) 782-3345
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE
H
EARING OR SPEECH IMPAIRED
(TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties,
FCA US LLC has installed special Telecommu-
nication Devices for the Deaf (TDD) equipment at
its customer center. Any hearing or speech
impaired customer, who has access to a TDD or a
conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the United
States, can communicate with FCA US LLC by
dialing 1-800-380-2479.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that
require assistance can use the special needs relay
service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY
teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice callers,
dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay
Service operator.
SERVICE CONTRACT
You may have purchased a service contract for a
vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of
unexpected repairs after FCA US LLC's New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The Mopar®
Vehicle Protection plans are the ONLY vehicle
extended protection plans authorized, endorsed
and backed by FCA US LLC to provide additional
protection beyond your vehicle’s warranty. If you
purchased a Mopar® Vehicle Protection Plan, you
will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner
Identification Card in the mail within three weeks
of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any
questions about the service contract, call FCA US
LLC's Service Contract National Customer Hotline
at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call
(800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983
French).
FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service
contract you may have purchased from another
manufacturer. If you require service after the FCA
US LLC New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires,
please refer to the contract documents, and
contact the person listed in those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major
investment when you purchased the vehicle. An
authorized dealer has also made a major
investment in facilities, tools, and training to
assure that you are absolutely delighted with the
ownership experience.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines
only), some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In
addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain, or
emit, chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm.
10
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 243
244 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to
this vehicle and market. Refer to
www.mopar.com/om for further information.
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
provisions of FCA Canada Inc. warranties
applicable to this vehicle and market. Refer to
www.owners.mopar.ca/en for further
information.
For French, refer to
www.owners.mopar.ca/fr for
further information.
Use this QR code to access your
digital experience.
MOPAR® PARTS
Mopar® original equipment parts & accessories
and factory filled fluids are available from an
authorized dealer. They are recommended for your
vehicle to keep it operating at its best and maintain
its original condition.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
IN THE 50 UNITED STATES AND
W
ASHINGTON, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect that could cause a crash or cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, an authorized
dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); or go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey
Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington,
D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.safercar.gov.
IN CANADA
If you believe that your vehicle has a
safety defect, you should contact the
Customer Service Department
immediately. Canadian customers who
wish to report a safety defect to the
Canadian government should contact
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect
Investigations and Recalls at
1-800-333-0510 or go to
wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/
PCDB-BDPP.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 244
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 245
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either
the website or the phone numbers listed below.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide a
complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components and is written in
straightforward language with illustrations,
diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with
diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These
manuals make it easy to find and fix problems on
computer-controlled vehicle systems and features.
They show exactly how to find and correct
problems, using step-by-step troubleshooting and
drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and
a complete list of all tools and equipment.
To order a hard copy of your Service or Diagnostic
Procedure manuals, visit:
www.techauthority.com (US and Canada).
Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with
the assistance of service and engineering
specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA
vehicles.
To access your Owner's Information online, visit
www.mopar.com/om (US) or
www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada).
Or
Call Tech Authority toll free at:
1-800-890-4038 (US)
Owner's Manuals, Radio Manuals and Warranty
Information Books can be ordered through
Archway at:
1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
GENERAL INFORMATION
UConnect
The following regulatory statement applies to
UConnect devices equipped in this vehicle:
FCC ID: Y7OVP2REFRESH
IC: 7812H-VP2REFRESH
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
and with Innovation, Science and Economic
Development Canada license-exempt RSS
standard(s). Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Development
applicables aux appareils radio exempts de
licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage,
et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre
le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Remarque: Les changements ou modifications
non expressément approuvés par la partie
responsable de la conformité peuvent annuler
l'autorisation de l'utilisateur à utiliser l'équi-
pement.
10
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 245
246
INDEX
A
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............200
Additives, Fuel ...............................................239
Advance Phone Connectivity .........................107
Air Bag
Air Bag Operation ......................................146
Driver Knee Air Bag ...................................146
Enhanced Accident Response......... 150, 188
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .......................188
Front Air Bag .............................................145
If Deployment Occurs................................149
Knee Impact Bolsters................................146
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ..............151
Maintenance .............................................151
Transporting Pets......................................168
Air Bag Light ...........................................44, 168
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter)..196
Air Conditioner Maintenance .........................196
Air Conditioner Refrigerant .................. 196, 197
Air Conditioner System ..................................196
Air Conditioning Filter ...................................... 31
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips................ 30, 31
Air Filter .........................................................196
Air Pressure
Tires ......................................................... 225
Alterations/Modifications
Vehicle........................................................... 7
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................. 200, 240
Disposal ................................................... 201
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ...................... 131
Anti-Lock Warning Light ...................................47
Assist, Hill Start............................................. 134
Audio Settings..................................................96
Audio Systems (Radio).....................................78
Auto Down Power Windows .............................34
Automatic Transmission ...........................55, 56
Adding Fluid..................................... 204, 241
Fluid And Filter Change ............................ 204
Fluid Change ............................................ 204
Fluid Level Check ............................ 203, 204
Fluid Type ........................................ 203, 241
Special Additives ...................................... 203
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) ..........32
Axle Fluid ...................................................... 241
B
Battery ................................................... 45, 194
Charging System Light.................................45
Keyless Key Fob Replacement ....................10
Belts, Seat .................................................... 168
Bluetooth
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone
Or Audio Device After Pairing................ 104
Body Builders Guide...........................................7
Body Mechanism Lubrication........................ 197
B-Pillar Location ............................................ 221
Brake Assist System ..................................... 132
Brake Fluid.................................................... 241
Brake System....................................... 202, 236
Anti-Lock (ABS) ......................................... 131
Fluid Check......................................202, 241
Master Cylinder ........................................ 202
Parking ........................................................54
Warning Light...............................................45
Brake, Parking .................................................54
Brake/Transmission Interlock..........................56
Bulb Replacement ........................................ 213
Bulbs, Light .......................................... 170, 213
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 246
247
C
Camera, Rear .................................................. 65
Capacities, Fluid ............................................240
Caps, Filler
Fuel ............................................................. 66
Oil (Engine)................................................193
Power Steering............................................ 60
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ......................201
Car Washes ...................................................234
Carbon Monoxide Warning ............................170
Cargo Area Cover............................................. 37
Cargo Compartment ........................................ 37
Cargo Tie-Downs.............................................. 37
Certification Label ........................................... 67
Chains, Tire....................................................232
Changing A Flat Tire.......................................171
Chart, Tire Sizing............................................218
Check Engine Light (Malfunction
Indicator Light) ................................................ 51
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ..................168
Checks, Safety...............................................168
Child Restraint...............................................152
Child Restraints
Booster Seats............................................155
Child Seat Installation ..................... 164, 166
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt .....161
Infant And Child Restraints .......................154
Locating The LATCH Anchorages .............. 160
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children.. 157
Older Children And Child Restraints ......... 154
Seating Positions...................................... 156
Clean Air Gasoline......................................... 238
Cleaning
Wheels ..................................................... 231
Climate Control ................................................28
Cold Weather Operation ..................................52
Compact Spare Tire ...................................... 229
Contract, Service .......................................... 243
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap)............ 201
Cooling System ............................................. 199
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ...................... 200
Coolant Level............................................ 201
Cooling Capacity....................................... 240
Disposal Of Used Coolant......................... 201
Drain, Flush, And Refill ............................. 200
Inspection........................................ 199, 201
Points To Remember................................ 202
Pressure Cap............................................ 201
Radiator Cap ............................................ 201
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze)..... 200, 240
Corrosion Protection ..................................... 233
Cruise Light......................................................50
Customer Assistance .................................... 242
Customer Programmable Features..................79
Cybersecurity ...................................................78
D
Defroster, Windshield ................................... 168
Deleting A Phone........................................... 104
Diagnostic System, Onboard ............................50
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) ............................................... 194
Power Steering ............................................60
Disable Vehicle Towing ................................. 187
Disconnecting ............................................... 104
Displayed
Values..........................................................44
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ...................... 201
Door Ajar ..........................................................45
Door Ajar Light .................................................45
Door Locks.......................................................13
Doors ...............................................................13
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt......................................16
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Standing Water .......................................76
E
Electric Brake Control System....................... 132
Electric Remote Mirrors ...................................23
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) .........32
Electronic Range Select (ERS) .........................59
11
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 247
248
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ...................132
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light ........ 46
Emergency, In Case Of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck......................185
Jacking ......................................................171
Jump Starting............................................181
Towing.......................................................187
Emission Control System Maintenance ........... 51
Engine ...........................................................193
Air Cleaner.................................................196
Block Heater ............................................... 53
Break-In Recommendations........................ 54
Checking Oil Level.....................................194
Coolant (Antifreeze)...................................240
Cooling ......................................................199
Exhaust Gas Caution.................................170
Fails To Start ............................................... 53
Flooded, Starting......................................... 53
Jump Starting............................................181
Oil.................................................... 195, 240
Oil Filler Cap ..............................................193
Oil Filter.....................................................196
Oil Selection .................................... 195, 240
Oil Synthetic ..............................................196
Overheating...............................................183
Starting ....................................................... 52
Enhanced Accident Response Feature ...150, 188
Ethanol ......................................................... 238
Exhaust Gas Cautions................................... 170
Exhaust System ................................... 170, 198
Exterior Lights.........................................24, 170
F
Filters
Air Cleaner................................................ 196
Air Conditioning ...........................................31
Engine Oil ........................................ 196, 240
Engine Oil Disposal................................... 196
Flashers
Hazard Warning........................................ 171
Turn Signals .......................................49, 170
Flooded Engine Starting...................................53
Fluid Capacities ............................................ 240
Fluid Leaks ................................................... 170
Fluid Level Checks
Brake........................................................ 202
Engine Oil ................................................. 194
Power Steering ............................................60
Fluid, Brake .................................................. 241
Fog Lights ........................................................25
Fold-Flat Seats.................................................16
Four-Way Hazard Flasher.............................. 171
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ................................ 185
Fuel............................................................... 237
Additives................................................... 239
Clean Air ................................................... 238
Ethanol ..................................................... 238
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .....................................66
Gasoline ................................................... 237
Materials Added ....................................... 239
Methanol .................................................. 238
Octane Rating..................................237, 240
Specifications ........................................... 240
Tank Capacity ........................................... 240
Fuses ............................................................ 207
G
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap)..................................66
Gasoline, (Fuel)............................................. 237
Gasoline, Clean Air........................................ 238
Gasoline, Reformulated ................................ 238
Gear Ranges ....................................................57
Gear Selector Override.................................. 184
Glass Cleaning .............................................. 235
Gross Axle Weight Rating ..........................67, 68
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating .....................67, 68
Guide
Body Builders.................................................7
GVWR...............................................................67
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 248
249
H
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Standing Water ....................................... 76
Hazard Warning Flashers ..............................171
Head Restraints............................................... 19
Headlights
Cleaning ....................................................234
Passing........................................................24
Switch ......................................................... 24
Heated Mirrors ................................................ 23
Heated Seats................................................... 18
Heater, Engine Block ....................................... 53
Hill Start Assist ..............................................134
Hitches
Trailer Towing.............................................. 70
Hood Prop........................................................ 36
Hood Release .................................................. 36
I
Ignition ............................................................ 12
Key ....................................................... 10, 12
Switch ......................................................... 12
Ignition Key Removal....................................... 12
Immobilizer (Sentry Key).................................. 12
Inside Rearview Mirror..................................... 22
Instrument Cluster....................................39, 40
Descriptions ................................................49
Display.........................................................40
Display Controls...........................................40
Engine Oil Reset ..........................................41
Menu Items .................................................42
Instrument Panel .............................................39
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning................... 235
Interior And Instrument Lights .........................25
Interior Appearance Care.............................. 235
Interior Lights...................................................25
iPod Control .....................................................32
iPod/USB/MP3 Control....................................32
Bluetooth Streaming Audio..........................32
J
Jack Location................................................ 171
Jack Operation.............................................. 171
Jacking And Tire Changing............................ 171
Jump Starting ............................................... 181
K
Key Fob
Programming Additional Key Fobs...............11
Key Fob Battery Service
(Remote Keyless Entry)....................................10
Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) ..11
Keys .................................................................10
Replacement ...............................................11
Sentry (Immobilizer).....................................12
L
Lane Change Assist..........................................25
Lap/Shoulder Belts....................................... 139
Latches ......................................................... 170
Hood............................................................36
Leaks, Fluid................................................... 170
Life Of Tires................................................... 227
Light Bulbs ...........................................170, 213
Lights ............................................................ 170
Air Bag ............................................... 44, 168
Brake Assist Warning................................ 133
Brake Warning.............................................45
Bulb Replacement .................................... 213
Cruise ..........................................................50
Daytime Running .........................................24
Engine Temperature Warning ......................46
Exterior .............................................. 24, 170
Hazard Warning Flasher ........................... 171
Headlights ...................................................24
Interior.........................................................25
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine)..........48
11
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 249
250
Park...................................................... 24, 49
Passing........................................................24
Seat Belt Reminder..................................... 46
Service ......................................................213
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS)...............135
Traction Control.........................................133
Turn Signals .......................................49, 170
Warning Instrument Cluster
Descriptions..................................... 46, 49
Loading Vehicle ........................................ 67, 68
Capacities ................................................... 68
Tires ..........................................................221
Locks
Power Door.................................................. 13
Low Tire Pressure System .............................135
Lubrication, Body...........................................197
Lug Nuts/Bolts ..............................................236
M
Maintenance Free Battery .............................194
Maintenance Schedule..................................189
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) .. 48, 51
Manual
Service ......................................................245
Master Cylinder
Brakes.......................................................202
Methanol .......................................................238
Mirrors .............................................................22
Electric Powered..........................................23
Electric Remote ...........................................23
Exterior Folding............................................23
Heated.........................................................23
Outside........................................................22
Rearview......................................................22
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle........................................................... 7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System...................... 135
Mopar Parts .................................................. 244
N
New Vehicle Break-In Period............................54
O
Occupant Restraints ..................................... 137
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ............ 237, 240
Oil Change Indicator ........................................41
Reset...........................................................41
Oil Filter, Change .......................................... 196
Oil Filter, Selection........................................ 196
Oil Pressure Light.............................................46
Oil Reset ..........................................................41
Oil, Engine............................................ 195, 240
Capacity.................................................... 240
Checking................................................... 194
Dipstick .................................................... 194
Disposal.................................................... 196
Filter ................................................ 196, 240
Filter Disposal........................................... 196
Identification Logo .................................... 195
Materials Added To................................... 196
Pressure Warning Light................................46
Recommendation ............................ 195, 240
Synthetic................................................... 196
Viscosity.................................................... 240
Onboard Diagnostic System.............................50
Operating Precautions .....................................50
Operator Manual
Owner's Manual........................................ 245
Outside Rearview Mirrors.................................22
Overheating, Engine...................................... 183
P
Paint Care ..................................................... 233
Parking Brake ..................................................54
ParkSense System, Rear..................................62
Passing Light....................................................24
Personal Settings.............................................79
Pets............................................................... 168
Phone Mode.................................................. 100
Placard, Tire And Loading Information .......... 221
Power
Mirrors .........................................................23
Steering .......................................................60
Windows ......................................................34
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 250
251
Power Steering Fluid......................................241
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts...................142
Preparation For Jacking.................................171
Pretensioners
Seat Belts..................................................142
R
Radial Ply Tires ..............................................226
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ............201
Radio Operation ............................................130
Rear Camera ................................................... 65
Rear ParkSense System .................................. 62
Recreational Towing ........................................ 75
Reformulated Gasoline..................................238
Refrigerant ....................................................197
Release, Hood ................................................. 36
Reminder, Seat Belt ......................................138
Remote Keyless Entry
Programming Additional Key Fobs .............. 11
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls........128
Replacement Bulbs .......................................213
Replacement Keys........................................... 11
Replacement Tires.........................................228
Reporting Safety Defects...............................244
Restraints, Child ............................................152
Restraints, Head.............................................. 19
Rotation, Tires ...............................................232
S
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ........................ 168
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ..................... 169
Safety Defects, Reporting ............................. 244
Safety Information, Tire ................................ 217
Safety Tips .................................................... 168
Safety, Exhaust Gas...................................... 170
Satellite Radio .................................................92
Schedule, Maintenance................................ 189
Seat Belts ............................................ 138, 168
Adjustable Shoulder Belt.......................... 141
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage..... 141
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage ..141
Child Restraints........................................ 152
Energy Management Feature ................... 142
Front Seat...............................138, 139, 140
Inspection................................................. 168
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation.................... 140
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting................... 141
Lap/Shoulder Belts .................................. 139
Operating Instructions.............................. 140
Pregnant Women...................................... 142
Pretensioners ........................................... 142
Rear Seat ................................................. 139
Reminder............................................46, 138
Seat Belt Pretensioner ............................. 142
Untwisting Procedure ............................... 141
Seats................................................................16
Adjustment ..................................................16
Heated.........................................................18
Rear Folding ................................................16
Tilting...........................................................16
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) .................. 240
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ..................................12
Service Assistance ........................................ 242
Service Contract............................................ 243
Service Manuals ........................................... 245
Settings, Audio.................................................96
Shift Lever Override ...................................... 184
Shifting
Automatic Transmission ..............................56
Shoulder Belts .............................................. 139
Signals, Turn .......................................... 49, 170
Sirius Satellite Radio........................................92
Favorites......................................................95
Replay..........................................................93
SiriusXM Satellite Radio
Browse in SXM.............................................95
Favorites......................................................95
Replay..........................................................93
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ............................ 232
Snow Tires .................................................... 229
Spare Tires...........................................229, 230
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline).......................................... 240
Oil ............................................................. 240
11
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 251
252
Speed Control
Cancel ......................................................... 62
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ........................ 60
Starting............................................................ 52
Automatic Transmission.............................. 52
Cold Weather .............................................. 52
Engine Fails To Start ...................................53
Steering ...........................................................16
Power .......................................................... 60
Tilt Column .................................................. 16
Wheel, Tilt ................................................... 16
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ......................128
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound
System Controls ............................................128
Storage............................................................ 31
Storage, Vehicle......................................30, 233
Storing Your Vehicle ......................................233
Sun Visor Extension......................................... 22
Sway Control, Trailer......................................134
Symbol Glossary ................................................ 8
Synthetic Engine Oil.......................................196
T
Telescoping Steering Column .......................... 16
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo.................................... 37
Tilt Steering Column ........................................ 16
Tire And Loading Information Placard ...........221
Tire Markings.................................................217
Tire Safety Information ..................................217
Tire Service Kit ..............................................179
Tires...................................169, 225, 229, 232
Aging (Life Of Tires) .................................. 227
Air Pressure .............................................. 225
Chains ...................................................... 232
Changing .................................................. 171
Compact Spare......................................... 229
General Information ........................ 225, 229
High Speed............................................... 226
Inflation Pressure ..................................... 225
Jacking ..................................................... 171
Life Of Tires .............................................. 227
Load Capacity.................................. 221, 222
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ..47, 135
Quality Grading......................................... 232
Radial ....................................................... 226
Replacement ............................................ 228
Rotation.................................................... 232
Safety .............................................. 217, 225
Sizes......................................................... 218
Snow Tires................................................ 229
Spare Tires ...................................... 229, 230
Spinning ................................................... 227
Trailer Towing ..............................................72
Tread Wear Indicators .............................. 227
Wheel Nut Torque..................................... 236
To Open Hood ..................................................36
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight .........................71
Towing..............................................................68
Disabled Vehicle ....................................... 187
Guide ...........................................................71
Recreational ................................................75
Weight .........................................................71
Towing Behind A Motorhome ...........................75
Traction............................................................76
Traction Control ............................................ 134
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ............................. 134
Trailer Towing...................................................68
Hitches ........................................................70
Minimum Requirements ..............................71
Tips..............................................................74
Trailer And Tongue Weight...........................71
Wiring ..........................................................73
Trailer Towing Guide ........................................71
Trailer Weight...................................................71
Transmission....................................................56
Automatic ................................... 55, 56, 203
Fluid.......................................................... 241
Maintenance ............................................ 203
Transporting Pets.......................................... 168
Tread Wear Indicators................................... 227
Trip Computer ..................................................43
Turn Signals .....................................................49
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 252
253
U
Uconnect
Phone Call Features..................................105
Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect Phone....................................107
Uconnect Phone ......................... 101, 102, 103
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call —
Call Currently In Progress......................106
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call —
No Call Currently In Progress ................106
Bluetooth Communication Link.................109
Call Continuation.......................................107
Call Controls..............................................105
Call Termination ........................................107
Cancel Command......................................102
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone
Or Audio Device After Pairing ................104
Help Command .........................................101
Join Calls ...................................................107
Making A Phone Or Audio Device
A Favorite..............................................104
Making A Second Call While Current Call
Is In Progress ........................................106
Managing Your Favorites...........................105
Operation ..................................................101
Overview....................................................100
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A
Mobile Phone ....................................... 102
Pair A Bluetooth Streaming Audio Device....103
Phonebook Download .............................. 104
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold .............. 106
Power-Up .................................................. 109
Recent Calls ............................................. 106
Redial ....................................................... 107
To Remove A Favorite............................... 105
Toggling Between Calls............................. 107
Touch-Tone Number Entry........................ 106
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone ....107
Voice Command ....................................... 107
Uniform Tire Quality Grades .......................... 232
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ................... 141
V
Vehicle Certification Label ...............................67
Vehicle Loading ...............................67, 68, 222
Vehicle Maintenance .................................... 195
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations...................... 7
Vehicle Storage.......................................30, 233
Voice Command...............................................21
Voice Recognition System (VR) ........................21
W
Warning Lights
Blue .............................................................50
Green...........................................................49
Red ..............................................................44
Yellow ..........................................................47
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster
Descriptions)....................................................49
Warning Lights And Messages .........................44
Warranty Information .................................... 244
Washers, Windshield ............................. 26, 194
Washing Vehicle............................................ 234
Water
Driving Through ...........................................76
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care........................... 231
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ........................... 231
Wind Buffeting .................................................35
Window Fogging...............................................30
Window Lockout Switch ...................................35
Windows ..........................................................34
Power...........................................................34
Windshield Defroster .................................... 168
Windshield Washers ........................................26
Fluid.......................................................... 194
Windshield Wiper Blades .............................. 197
Windshield Wipers ................................. 26, 194
Wipers Blade Replacement........................... 197
Wrecker Towing............................................. 187
11
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 253
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting
in an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature
that may take their attention off the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle
navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving
is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle
operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting
while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Ram brand vehicle and to provide a convenient
reference for common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information on accessories to help personalize your vehicle,
visit mopar.com/om (U.S.), owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Ram brand dealer.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far
below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or use public
transportation.
WARNING
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired
when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
©2022 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Ram is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
Ram est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
First Edition
22_VM_OM_EN_USC
Whether it is providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to
take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you will find the app an important extension of your Ram vehicle.
Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store
®
or Google Play
®
Store and enter the search keyword “ram toolbox” (U.S. residents only).
DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,
RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS
OWNERS.MOPAR.CA
CANADA
MOPAR.COM/OM
U.S.
